208 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 357

Handbook

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


208 Flipbook Start MyPEUGEOT 208 Start MyPEUGEOT 208

Mirror Screen
Start Start

User guide to download to your smartphone to display in the touch screen

The online user guide:


http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/

The Start MyPEUGEOT application is available Google Play for smartphones that support
for the whole PEUGEOT 208 range and allows MirrorLinkTM (the CarPlay version is being
you to familiarise yourself with your new prepared by Apple).
PEUGEOT. The synchronisation of a personal smartphone
Find all of the information from the handbook
for your vehicle on the internet. allows users to display applications from the
Summary of the main systems and their smartphone adapted for the MirrorLinkTM
The latest information included is settings. technology (subject to eligibility).
represented by the symbol! Instructions for use of the driving assistance
systems. The interactivity with Start MyPEUGEOT
becomes available in landscape format in the
From the home page presenting the range, Library of warning lamps and symbols. touch screen.
choose a language, click on the body style and
then the edition, by reference to the date of first Focus on the audio & telematic functions.
registration of the vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Welcome
Thank you for choosing a 208.
This handbook has been designed to help you make the most of your
vehicle in all circumstances.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Overview Indicators Driving


Exterior view 4 Instrument panels 34 Driving recommendations 109
Interior view 5 Date and time 36 Mirrors 110
Instruments and controls 6 Library of indicator and warning lamps 37 Manual 5 gearbox 112
Middle console 8 Library of symbols 49 Manual 6 gearbox 112
Upper console 9 Engine coolant temperature 51 Electronic 5 gearbox 113
Lower console 9 Instrument panel dimmer 52 Electronic 6 gearbox 113
Underbonnet view 10 Gear shift indicator 59 Automatic 4 gearbox 116
Energy load 60 Automatic 6 gearbox 116
Parking sensors 119
Reversing camera 121
Park Assist 122
Speed limiter 126
Access and starting Comfort
Cruise control 128
Unlocking - Key 11 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 61 Active City Brake 133
Doors 11 Front seats 62 Road holding 136
3-door 12 One-piece rear seats 66 Trip computer 139
Starting 13 Ventilation 69 Eco-driving 142
Switching off 15 Demist - defrost 72
Locking - Key 16 Heating 74
Parking brake 19 Air conditioning 76
Stop & Start 20 Window controls 81
Hill start assist 23 Wipers 83
Ports and sockets - Connectivity 24 Carrying children 87
Details of the roof console 25 Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 89
Sunroof blind 26 ISOFIX child seats 96
Mood lighting 27 Child lock 101
Boot 28 Seat belts 102
Alarm 29 Airbags 105
Advice 31

208_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Lighting and signalling Practical information Key

Direction indicators 144 General information 174 Warning


Hazard warning lamps 144 Bonnet 175 This symbol marks warnings which it is
Lighting 145 Weights 179 essential to observe for your own safety,
Automatic illumination of headlamps 149 Fuel tank 180 for the safety of others or to avoid any risk
LED lamps 150 BlueHDi and AdBlue ® additive 185 of damaging your vehicle.
Daytime running lamps 150 Battery 190
Headlamp adjustment 152 Fuses 193
Cornering lighting 153 Triangle 199 Information
Changing a bulb 154 Under-inflation 200
This symbol draws your attention to
Temporary puncture repair kit 203
additional information for better use of
Spare wheel 208
your vehicle.
Advice 215
Dimensions 217
Protection of the environment
Identification markings 219
This symbol accompanies advice relating
to protection of the environment.

Advice
This symbol indicates a reminder of
Fittings Audio equipment and telematics practical information.

Fittings 161 Emergency call 220 Section identification


Fitting roof bars 164 Assistance call 221
Coloured blocks separate and identify each
Towing a trailer 165 7-inch touch screen 223
section.
Towing 167 Audio system / Bluetooth 287
Accessories 169 Audio system 307 Start

Heading

End
Alphabetical index

208_en_Chap00a_sommaire_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Exterior view
Remote control key 11-17, 32
- opening / closing
- anti-theft protection
- guide-me-home lighting
- starting
- switching off Wipers 83-86
- battery Sunroof blind 26 Changing a wiper blade 86
Roof bars 164 Demisting - Defrosting 72-73
Accessories 169-171
Lighting controls 145-151 Advice on care 172
Boot 28, 31
LED lamps 150 - opening / closing
Daytime running lamps 150 - emergency release
Headlamp beam adjustment 152 Reversing camera 121
Cornering lighting 153 Temporary puncture repair kit 203-207
Changing bulbs 154-158
- front lamps
- foglamps
Park Assist 122-125
- direction indicator repeaters
Parking sensors 119-120
Towbar 165-166
Towing 167-168
Door mirrors 110-111
Changing bulbs 158-160
- rear lamps
Doors 16-18, 31 - 3rd brake lamp
- opening / closing - number plate lamps
- central locking Road holding 136-138 - foglamp
- emergency control
Snow chains 171
Courtesy lighting 25
Under-inflation 200-202
Alarm 29-30 Fuel tank, misfuel prevention 180-183
Tyre pressures 206-207, 219
Electric windows 81-82 Running out of Diesel fuel 184
Spare wheel 208-214
- tools
- removing / refitting

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Interior view

Front seats
Heated seats
Front arm rest
62-64
65
65
1
Boot fittings 163-164
- rear parcel shelf
- hooks
- boot lamp
Airbags 105-108
- lashing rings
Interior mirror 111

Rear seats 66-68


Interior fittings 24, 161-162
- 12 V accessory socket
- USB port / Auxiliary socket
- illuminated glove box
Child seats 87-100
- mats
Child seats used with a 3-point
seat belt 93-95 Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag 89, 106
ISOFIX child seats 96-99
Manual child lock 101
Electric child lock 101
Seat belts 102-104 Parking brake 19
Warning triangle 199 Moving off on a slope 23

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Instruments and controls


On the left On the right
Lighting. Screen wash/wipe.
145-151 83-85
Direction indicators. Trip computer.
144 139-141

Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls


for the touch screen: for the touch screen: menu,
volume, change source. select and display stations/
226 media, confirm, telephone.

226

Cruise control. Steering mounted controls


128-130 for the audio system:
Speed limiter. volume, change source,
126-127 select stations and tracks,
Adjust the steering wheel for
telephone (Bluetooth audio
Memorise speeds. height and reach. 61
system).
131-132
289

"+" Change up (if electronic


"-" Change down gearbox).
(if electronic gearbox).
Front airbag. 105-106
113-115
Horn. 113-115

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Side switch panel*

Reinitialise the under-inflation


1
Deactivate the rear parking sensors
detection (without touch screen).
119-120 200-202

or

Activate Park Assist Deactivate volumetric alarm


monitoring.
122-125 29-30

Deactivate the DSC/ASR Activate the electric child lock.


system.
136-138 101

Adjust the headlamp beam height. A lamp indicates the state of the
Deactivate Stop & Start. function.

20-22 152

* Depending on version.
7

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Centre console
Middle console

Central locking.
Touch screen. 18

223-285
Heating / Ventilation.
74-75
Bluetooth audio system.
Manual air
287-305 conditioning.
76-77

Audio system.
Automatic dual-zone
307-318
air conditioning.
78-80

Hazard warning lamps.


144

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Upper console Lower console

Gearbox:
1
Manual 5.
112

Manual 6.
112

PEUGEOT Connect Assistance. 12 V socket. Electronic 5.


221 24 113-115

PEUGEOT Connect SOS. USB port / Jack auxiliary socket. Electronic 6.


220 24 113-115

Courtesy lamp switches. Automatic 4.


25 116-118

Active city brake. Automatic 6.


133-135 116-118

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Overview

Underbonnet view
12V battery 190-192
Load reduction, economy mode 60
Engine compartment fuses 193-194, 198
AdBlue ® additive 185-189 Running out of fuel, Diesel 184 Dashboard fuses 193-197
Checking levels 176-177
- oil
- brake fluid
- coolant
- screenwash fluid Petrol weights 174, 178
- additive (HDi Diesel AdBlue ®) Diesel weights 174, 179
Checks and maintenance 181, 215-216
- air filter
- oil, oil filter
- particle filter (Diesel)
- brake fluid
- brake pads / discs

Changing bulbs 154-160


- front
- rear
Identification markings 219
Opening the bonnet 175
Dimensions 217-218
Under the bonnet, petrol 176
Under the bonnet, Diesel 177
Petrol engines 174, 178
Diesel engines 174, 179

10

208_en_Chap01_vue-ensemble_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Remote control Doors


Complete unlocking
Using the key
F Turn to the front.
Using the remote control
2
F Press once to unlock the driver's
door only.

Using the remote control


F Press twice in succession to unlock the
F Press.
other doors and the boot.

A. Unfolding / Folding.
B. Unlocking.
Disarming the alarm.
Selective unlocking Unlocking is confirmed by rapid
flashing of the direction indicators for
C. Locking.
Complete unlocking is activated by default. approximately two seconds.
Locating the vehicle.
According to version, the electric door
Arming the alarm.
mirrors unfold at the same time as the
In the "Driving assistance" menu
first unlocking action.
This is set in the "Driving
assistance" menu, then "Vehicle
settings" and "Vehicle access".

11

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

3-door
Locating your vehicle Access to the rear seats
F A press switches on the vehicle's Folding the front seat forward
lighting and flashes the direction
indicators for a few seconds to
help you locate your vehicle in a
car park.

Guide-me-home lighting
Standard model Sport model
Make a long press on this button to
F Pull only this control upwards to fold the F Pull only this control forward to fold the
operate the guide-me-home lighting
backrest and slide the whole seat forward. seat backrest and move the whole seat
(switching on the sidelamps, dipped
The front seat returns to its original position forward.
beams and number plate lamps).
when straightening the backrest. The front seat returns to its original position
when straightening the backrest.

Ensure that no object or person might


A second press before the end of the timed
prevent the seat runners returning to
period cancels the guide-me-home lighting.
their original position; the return to this
position is necessary to secure the
seat.
Ensure that the seat belt has reeled
in correctly so as to not impede
passengers' access to the rear seats.

12

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Starting Electronic engine immobiliser

2
The original key contains a coded electronic chip.
Ignition When the ignition is switched on, starting is only
possible if the code is detected and recognised.
This protection against theft locks the engine
management system a few moments after the
ignition is switched off and prevents starting of
the engine following a break-in.
In the event of a fault, you are
informed by illumination of the
warning lamp, an audible signal and the display
of a message.
Mode - Gearbox In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact
Manual a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
F Place the gear lever in neutral. Advice
Steering wheel
Electronic In some cases, you may have to apply
Keep away from your vehicle, the
F Place the gear lever at position N. some force to turn the steering (if the
label attached to the keys given to you
wheels are on lock against a kerb, for
on acquisition of the vehicle. It will
Automatic example).
help in finding the original code for
F Place the gear lever at position P or N. replacement of the key.

Starting
F Insert the key into the ignition switch. Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
The system recognises the starting code. key or the remote control, which would
F Unlock the steering column by weigh down on its blade in the ignition
simultaneously turning the steering wheel switch and could cause a malfunction.
and the key It could adversely affect the deployment
F Turn the key towards the dashboard to of the front airbag.
position 3 (Starting).
F When the engine starts, release the key.

13

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Moving off - Gearbox

Manual Electronic Automatic


F Start the engine. F To start the engine, place the lever at F Apply the parking brake.
position N. F Select position P or N.
F Press the clutch pedal fully down. F Start the engine.
F Press firmly on the brake pedal.
There is an audible signal, accompanied by the
display of an alert message, if the gear lever is
F Engage first gear. F Start the engine.
not in the right position.
F Release the parking brake. F Select position A.
F Release the parking brake.
F Progressively release the clutch F With the engine running, press the
pedal and accelerate away. F Progressively release the brake brake pedal.
pedal, then accelerate away.
F Release the parking brake.
F Select position D.
Do not drive with your hand resting on If you move off in position M, remember F Progressively release the brake
the gear lever as this risks damaging to operate the lever or a paddle to pedal.
the gearbox. engage the gear.
The vehicle then moves off.

14

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Switching off
Ignition
Automatic
2
F Place the gear lever at position P or N.
F Immobilise the vehicle.
F Apply the parking brake.
F Turn the key towards you to position 1 (Stop).
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Procedure - Gearbox Coasting Key left in the "Ignition on"


As a safety measure, do not coast position
Manual (free-wheeling in neutral or with the On opening the driver's door, an alert
clutch pedal depressed). message is displayed, accompanied by an
F Place the gear lever in neutral.
F Immobilise the vehicle. audible signal, to remind you that the key is
F Apply the parking brake. Switching off the engine leads to a loss still in the ignition switch at position 1 (Stop).
F Turn the key towards you to position 1 (Stop). of braking assistance.
If the key has been left in the ignition
F Remove the key from the ignition switch. switch at position 2 (Ignition on),
the ignition will be switched off
Steering wheel automatically after one hour.
Electronic To facilitate unlocking of the steering To switch the ignition back on, turn the
F Place the gear lever at position N. wheel, it is recommended that you key to position 1 (Stop), then back to
F Immobilise the vehicle. place the wheels in the straight ahead position 2 (Ignition on).
F Apply the parking brake. position before switching off the engine.
F Turn the key towards you to position 1 (Stop).
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.

15

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Locking - Key
Locking If one of the doors or the boot is still
open or if an electronic key has been left
inside the vehicle, the locking does not
Using the key take place.
F Turn the key towards the rear of the When the vehicle is locked, if it
vehicle. is unlocked inadvertently, it will
automatically lock itself again after about
thirty seconds, unless a door is opened.
Using the remote control
F Press. Folding the key
As a safety measure (passengers on F Press this button before folding the key.
board), never leave the vehicle, even for
Maintaining the locking action (key or remote a short period, without taking your key
control) automatically closes the windows. with you. If you do not press the button, there is a
risk of damaging the remote control.

Locking is confirmed by fixed


illumination of the direction indicators
for approximately two seconds.
According to version, the electric door
mirrors fold at the same time.
The folding and unfolding of the electric
door mirrors can be deactivated by
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

16

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Deadlocking
(depending on version)
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
Using the remote control
F Press.
2
interior door controls inoperative. F Press again within five seconds
It also deactivates the manual central to deadlock the vehicle.
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Using the key Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed


F Turn the key to the rear in the driver's door illumination of the direction indicators
lock. for approximately two seconds.
F Turn the key to the rear again within five Depending on version, the electric door
seconds to deadlock the vehicle. mirrors fold at the same time.

17

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

From the inside


Unlocking Automatic central locking
F Press the button again. The doors can lock automatically while driving
(speed above 6 mph [10 km/h]).
To turn this function on or off (on by default).
F press and hold the button until there is an
The indicator lamp in the button goes off. audible signal and/or a message in the
screen.

When locking / deadlocking from


outside
Locking When the vehicle is locked or
deadlocked from outside, the switch
F Press the button.
does not operate. Driving with the doors locked may make
F After normal locking, pull the access to the passenger compartment
interior door lever to unlock the by the emergency services more
This allows the doors and the boot to be locked. vehicle. difficult in an emergency.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. F After deadlocking, you have to use
the remote control or the key to
unlock the vehicle.
If one of the doors is open, locking of
the doors from the inside does not take
place.

18

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Parking brake
Operation
Remember to fully lower the parking
brake lever.
2
When parking on a steep slope, direct
your wheels against the kerb, apply the
parking brake, engage a gear opposite
to the direction the vehicle is facing and
switch off the ignition.
On return to the vehicle, remember
that a gear had been engaged before
starting the engine.
Release Application
F Pull the parking brake lever up gently, F Pull the lever up to immobilise your vehicle.
press the release button then lower the
lever fully. If excessive travel or a loss of
effectiveness of this system is noticed,
the parking brake must be checked,
When the vehicle is being driven,
even between two services.
if this warning lamp and the STOP
Checks of this safety-related system
warning lamp come on, accompanied
must be carried by a PEUGEOT dealer
by an audible signal and a message in the
or a qualified workshop.
screen, this indicates that the parking brake is
still on or has not been fully released.

19

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Stop & Start


Principle Operation
The system puts the engine temporarily into
STOP mode Special cases
standby - STOP mode - during stops in the
traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...). The STOP mode is not invoked when:
The "ECO" lamp comes on in the
engine restarts automatically - START mode - - the driver's door is open,
instrument panel and the engine goes
as soon as you want to move off. The restart - the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
into standby.
takes place instantly, quickly and silently. - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system Operation (10 km/h) since the last engine start using
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust With e-HDi Diesel and a manual gearbox: the key,
emissions as well as the noise level when - Speed lower below 12 mph (20 km/h). - the engine is needed to maintain a
stationary. - Gear lever in neutral. comfortable temperature in the passenger
- Clutch pedal released. compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
Operation ambient temperature...) where the engine is
With e-HDi Diesel and an electronic needed to assure control of a system.
gearbox:
- Speed below 40 mph (6 km/h).
- Gear lever in position N
Or The "ECO" lamp flashes for a few
- Brake pedal pressed. seconds then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.


Operation
With e-VTi, e-THP petrol:
- As soon as the vehicle stops.
With BlueHDi Diesel:
- As soon as the vehicle stops.

20

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Advice
START mode
The "ECO" lamp goes off and the
Special cases
As a safety measure and for your comfort,
2
engine restarts. START mode is invoked automatically when:
A time counter calculates the
- you open the driver's door,
sum of the periods in STOP
Operation - you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
mode during a journey. It rests
With a manual gearbox: - some special conditions (battery charge,
itself to zero every time the
- Clutch pedal depressed. engine temperature, braking assistance,
ignition is switched on with the
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
key. Operation needed for control of a system.
With an electronic gearbox:
For your comfort, during parking
- Gear lever in position A.
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not
- Brake pedal released.
available for a few seconds after
or
coming out of reverse gear.
- Gear lever in position N.
STOP mode does not affect the The "ECO" warning lamp flashes for
- Brake pedal released.
functionality of the vehicle, such as for a few seconds, then goes off.
- Then gear lever in position A.
example, braking, power steering...
or This operation is perfectly normal.
- Reverse gear engaged.

Never refuel with the engine in STOP


mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.

21

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

"Eco OFF" Operating fault Maintenance

Before doing anything under the


bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from automatic operation of
START mode.

This system requires a battery with a special


specification and technology (reference
This control switches off the Stop & Start In the event of a fault with the system, the numbers available from a PEUGEOT dealer or
system. "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes then a qualified workshop).
comes on continuously. Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT
Operation Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a introduces the risk of malfunction of the
- Press. qualified workshop. system.
- The indicator lamp in the control remains on. In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the
- A message is displayed. vehicle may stall. All of the warning lamps
If the vehicle is stationary in Stop mode, the come on. It is then necessary to switch off the
engine immediately restarts. ignition and start the engine again using the
The Stop & Start system is automatically key.
restored at every new start with the key.
The indicator lamp in the control is off.

Restoring the "ECO" function The Stop & Start system makes use
when driving of advanced technology. All work on
Operation this type of battery must be done by
- Press. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
- The indicator lamp in the control goes off. workshop.
- A confirmation message is displayed.

22

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Hill start assist


The hill start assist system is active when:
- your foot on the brake pedal fully
immobilises the vehicle,
- when certain conditions of gradient are
2
met,
- the driver’s door is closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.

No one should leave the vehicle while


it is being held in the hill start assist
phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle while
Operation Operation
the engine is running, apply the parking
This system helps you move off on a slope, by On an ascending slope with the vehicle brake manually then ensure that the
holding your vehicle for around 2 seconds, the stationary, the vehicle is held momentarily parking brake warning lamp is on (not
time to move your foot from the brake pedal to when you release the brake pedal. flashing) in the instrument panel.
the accelerator. With a manual gearbox*, if you are in first gear
or in neutral.
With an electronic gearbox, if you are in
position A. Service
With an automatic gearbox, if you are in The fixed illumination of these warning lamps
position D. indicates a fault with the system.

On a descending slope, with the vehicle


stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held momentarily when you
release the brake pedal. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

* Depending on version.
23

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Ports and sockets - Connectivity


12 V socket USB port / Jack auxiliary socket

F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum This connection box, consisting of an USB port When the USB port is used, the portable device
power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and and a JACK auxiliary socket is located on the charges automatically.
connect a suitable adaptor. centre console. While charging, a message is displayed if the
It allows the connection of portable device, current drawn by the portable device exceeds
such as a digital audio player of the iPod ® type the power rating of the vehicle's port.
or a USB memory stick.
It reads the audio files which are transmitted to
Do not exceed the maximum power your audio system and played via the vehicle's
rating of the socket (otherwise there is a speakers.
risk of damaging your portable device). You can manage these files using the steering
mounted controls or the audio system control
panel and display them in the instrument panel For more information on the use of this
screen. system, refer to the "Audio equipment
and telematics" section.

24

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Layout of the roof console


Courtesy lamp
In this position, the lighting
comes on gradually:
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press
the corresponding switch.
2
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when opening a door, Take care to avoid leaving anything in
- when unlocking with the remote control. contact with the courtesy lamp.

It goes off gradually:


- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

1. Courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
time varies according to the circumstances:
- with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.

25

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Sunroof blind
Opening Closing

F Take the blind by its handle and push it F Take the blind by its handle and pull it
rearward to the desired position. forward to the desired position.

26

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Mood lighting
Switching on
At night, interior mood light emitting diodes -
LEDs (courtesy lamp, instrument panel,
footwells, panoramic sunroof...) come on
2
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
on.

Switching off
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.

Settings
Settings for the centre console and panoramic
sunroof lighting can be adjusted via the vehicle
settings menu in the touch screen

27

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Boot
Opening Closing
F Lower the tailgate using the interior grab
handle.
F If necessary, press down on the tailgate to
fully close it.

Boot still open


- With the engine is running, this
is signalled by this warning lamp
coming on and an alert message
displayed for a few seconds,

Using the key. - With the vehicle moving (speed above


Using the remote control. 6 mph (10 km/h)), by an audible signal as
well.

F After unlocking the boot or the vehicle,


press the opening control which releases
the tailgate, and then guide it open.

28

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Alarm
The alarm provides the following types of monitoring: For all work on the alarm system, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Total
Disarmed

F Press the unlocking button on


the remote control.
2
Operation The alarm system is switched off: the
indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Armed
F Switch off the ignition and get out
of the vehicle. Automatic arming (depending on version)
Monitoring is active 2 minutes after the last
Monitoring F Press the locking button on the door or the boot is closed.
- Exterior perimeter remote control. F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, first press the button on the
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
The alarm monitoring system is active: the remote control before opening a door.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
indicator lamp in the button flashes once per
door, the boot, the bonnet...
second.

- Interior volumetric Timing:


The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated
The system checks for any variation in the
after a delay of 5 seconds.
Perimeter
volume in the passenger compartment.
The interior volumetric monitoring after a delay
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
of 45 seconds. Operation
window, enters the passenger compartment or
If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
moves inside the vehicle.
fully, the vehicle is not locked but the exterior to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
perimeter monitoring will be activated after a certain cases such as:
Self-protection function delay of 45 seconds at the same time as the - leaving a pet in the vehicle,
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central interior volumetric monitoring. - leaving a window partially open,
control or the wires of the siren are put out of - washing your vehicle.
service or damaged.

29

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Without Advice
Armed Operation
F Press the unlocking button on the remote
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
control to deactivate the exterior perimeter Failure of the remote control
in the driver's door lock.
monitoring. To deactivate the monitoring functions:
F Press the locking button on the remote F Unlock the vehicle using the key in the
control to activate all the monitoring driver's door lock.
functions.
The indicator lamp in the button again flashes
Triggering of the alarm F Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The
once per second. indicator lamp in the button goes off.
What happens
Disarmed When the alarm is triggered the siren

F Switch off the ignition.


sounds and the direction indicators flash for Malfunction
thirty seconds.
F Within ten seconds, press the When the ignition is switched on, fixed
The monitoring functions remain active until
button until the indicator lamp is illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
on continuously. indicates a malfunction of the system.
succession.
F Get out of the vehicle. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
F Press the locking button on the When the vehicle is unlocked using qualified workshop.
remote control immediately. the remote control, rapid flashing
of the indicator lamp in the button
informs you that the alarm was
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
triggered during your absence. When the
activated: the indicator lamp in the button
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
flashes once per second.
immediately.

To be effective, the deactivation must


be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.

30

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Advice
Doors Boot
2

Back-up manual locking Passenger doors Tailgate release


For mechanically locking and unlocking the F On the rear doors, check that the child lock System for mechanical unlocking of the boot in
doors in the event of a fault with the central is not on. the event of a central locking malfunction.
locking system or a battery failure. F Remove the black cap located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
F Insert the key into the aperture without
Driver's door forcing, then without turning, move the Unlocking
Insert the key in the lock to lock or unlock the latch sideways towards the inside of the
F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
door. door.
the lock from inside the boot.
F Remove the key and refit the cap.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.

31

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Remote control problem


Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, Reinitialisation Changing the battery
replacement of the remote control battery or
F Switch off the ignition.
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition).
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
F Press the closed padlock immediately for a
vehicle.
few seconds.
F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
or lock your vehicle.
from the ignition switch.
F Then, reinitialise the remote control.
The remote control is fully operational again.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer as soon as possible.

Do not throw the remote control


batteries away, they contain metals Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
which are harmful to the environment. If the battery is flat, you are informed
Take them to an approved collection by lighting of this warning lamp in the
point. instrument panel, an audible signal
and a message in the screen.
F Unclip the cover using a screwdriver in the
cutout.
F Remove the cover.
F Extract the flat battery from its location.
F Place the new battery into its location
observing the original direction.
F Clip the cover in place.

32

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Lost keys Anti-theft protection Second-hand vehicle

2
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's Do not make any modifications to the Have the pairing of all of the keys in your
registration document, your personal electronic engine immobiliser system; this possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer,
identification documents and if possible the could cause malfunctions. to ensure that only your keys can be used to
key code label. open and start the vehicle.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look
up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.

Remote control Locked vehicle


The high frequency remote control is a Driving with the doors locked may make
sensitive system; do not operate it while it is access to the passenger compartment by
in your pocket as there is a possibility that the emergency services more difficult in an
it may unlock the vehicle, without you being emergency.
aware of it. As a safety precaution, never leave children
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your alone in the vehicle, except for a very short
remote control out of range and out of sight period.
of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping In all cases, it is essential to remove the key
it from working and the remote control from the ignition switch when leaving the
would have to be reinitialised. vehicle.
No remote control can operate when the
key is in the ignition switch, even when
the ignition is switched off, except for
reinitialisation.

33

208_en_Chap02_Acces-Demarrage_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Instrument panels

Rev counter Control button Speedometer


Recall the servicing
Rev counter (x 1000 rpm), information.
graduation depends on the Adjust the time.
engine (petrol or Diesel). Reset the function selected (service indicator Analogue speedometer
or trip recorder). (km/h or mph).
Depending on version:
- Adjust the time.
- Digital speedometer.

Indicator Instrument panel lighting Fuel gauge

Main lighting dimmer.

Engine coolant temperature


Instrument panel ambience
indicator. Fuel level in the tank.
lighting.

34

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Display screens
3
Engine oil level indicator (depending
Cruise control settings.
on version).

Gear shift indicator with a manual


Speed limiter settings.
gearbox.

Service indicator. Selector position and gear


with an electronic gearbox.
Selector position and gear
with an automatic gearbox.
Odometer (km or miles).

Trip recorder (km or miles). Digital speedometer


(km/h or mph).

This function can be


deactivated by a long press
on this button (depending on
version).

35

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Date and time


Touch screen

Press MENU to display the "MAIN In the secondary page, select Modify the setting using the virtual keypad then
MENU". "Time/Date". confirm.

Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date". Press "Confirm" to save and quit.
Select "Settings".

Select "Secondary page".

36

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Library of indicator and

3
Instrument panel warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps Associated warnings
● indicator lamp informing that a system is The illumination of certain warning lamps
switched on, may be accompanied by an audible signal
● warning lamp for preventive purposes or for and a message in the instrument panel or
a fault. multifunction screen.
The warning lamps may come on continuously
(fixed) or flash.
Certain warning lamps may come on in one of
F Each press of this button moves between When the ignition is switched on two modes. Only by relating the type of lighting
the following settings: to the operating status of the vehicle can it be
Certain warning lamps come on for a few ascertained whether the situation is normal or
- hours,
seconds in the instrument panel and/or whether a fault has occurred.
- minutes,
instrument panel screen when the vehicle's
- 12 or 24 hour format.
ignition is switched on.
When the engine is started, these same
warning lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information in the table on the warning lamp
concerned.

37

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Parking brake fixed. The parking brake is applied or not Release the parking brake to switch off the warning
properly released. lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.

Foot on the fixed. The brake pedal must be pressed. With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to
brake pedal start the engine (lever in position N).
With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running,
press the brake pedal before releasing the parking
brake, to unlock the lever and come out of position P.
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will
remain on.

flashing. With an electronic gearbox, if you Use the brake pedal and/or the parking brake.
hold the vehicle on an incline using
the accelerator for too long, the
clutch overheats.

Diesel engine fixed. The ignition switch is at the Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
pre-heating 2nd position (ignition on). The period of illumination of the warning lamp is
determined by the climatic conditions (up to about
thirty seconds in extreme climatic conditions).
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.

38

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

3
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Foot on the fixed. In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, You must declutch fully to allow the change to engine
clutch* changing to START mode is refused START mode.
because the clutch pedal is not fully
down.

Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
system has put the engine into STOP move off.
mode.

flashes for a STOP mode is temporarily For more information on special cases with STOP
few seconds, then unavailable. mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start"
goes off. or section.
START mode is invoked
automatically.

Automatic fixed. The wiper control is pushed Automatic front wiping is activated.
wiping downwards. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control
stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.

Passenger's fixed. The control, located in the glove box, Set the control to the ON position to activate the
airbag system is set to the OFF position. passenger's front airbag.
The passenger's front airbag is In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward
deactivated. facing position.
In this case you can install a rearward
facing child seat.

* Except for the active matrix instrument panel.


39

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

STOP fixed, associated with It is associated with the engine Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
another warning lamp. oil pressure or the engine coolant Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT
temperature. dealer or qualified workshop.

Service fixed, associated with Major faults have occurred. Refer to the section on this warning lamp and you
another warning lamp. must then contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop.

fixed associated with a Faults have occurred for which there Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the
message (if a display is no specific warning lamp. screen (if a display screen is fitted) and refer to the
screen is fitted). corresponding section:
- engine oil level alert,
- risk of blockage of the particle filter (Diesel),
- Diesel fuel additive level (Diesel with particle
filter).
You must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

40

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

3
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Braking fixed. The braking system fluid level has You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
dropped significantly. Top up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

+ fixed, associated The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
lamp. workshop.

Maximum fixed with the needle The temperature of the cooling Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
coolant in the red zone. system is too high. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
temperature up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.

Anti-lock fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Braking System fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
(ABS) PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.

41

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Dynamic flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is The system optimises traction and improves the
stability control operating. directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
(DSC/ASR) grip or trajectory.

fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

Power steering fixed. The power steering has a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

Engine fixed. The emission control system has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
autodiagnosis fault. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
system workshop without delay.

flashing. The engine management system has Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

fixed, associated with the A minor engine fault has been Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
SERVICE warning lamp. detected. workshop.

fixed, associated with A major engine fault has been You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
the STOP warning detected. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
lamp. dealer or a qualified workshop.

42

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

3
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Dedicated range No alert. Range greater than 2 400 km


indicator (1 500 miles).

Alert Top-up the AdBlue ® additive, without waiting for subsequent alerts.

Level 1 UREA – Alert given and Range for the remaining additive in Alert repeated every additional 300 km (200 miles)
Service warning repeated every time the additive tank between 2 400 km covered.
lamp comes on the ignition is switched (1500 miles) and 600 km (375 miles) Top-up.
on.

Level 2 UREA – From switching on Range between 600 km (375 miles) Repeated every 50 km (30 miles) covered.
Service warning the ignition with the and 0. Top-up.
lamp comes on display of driving
range in km or miles
and every time the
+
ignition is switched on.

Alert repeated every Remaining range close to 0. Top-up the AdBlue ® additive without waiting for
30 seconds. subsequent alerts.
Top-up.

All alerts are fixed. AdBlue ® additive level at 0. As soon as the vehicle stops, the engine cuts out.
Starting inhibited. The engine will not restart.
You have to call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.

43

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Checking information from alert level 2

In the display Temporary display. "No starting in" To top-up, refer to the "BlueHDi and AdBlue ® additive"
screen section for more information and the precautions to
take.
In the touch How to CHECK
screen

Select
Driving assistance.

Then
Diagnosis.

CHECK

44

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

3
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

SCR system fault

+
UREA, SERVICE an audible signal and Emissions fault. Temporary fault.
and engine a message. The alert disappears as soon as the exhaust
diagnostic emissions levels return to the level required by the
+ warning lamp standard.

After 50 km confirmed. This is not a fault related to a lack of An engine starting inhibition system is activated
(30 miles) additive. automatically from 1 100 km (700 miles) travelled
since this detection.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
as soon as possible to have it checked.

45

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Low fuel level fixed with the needle There remains approximately 5 litres Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of
in the red zone. of fuel in the tank. fuel.
At this point, you begin to use the fuel This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition
reserve. is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
made.
flashing with the There remains very little fuel in the Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres.
needle in the red tank. Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as
zone. this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.

Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

Battery charge fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started.
cut alternator belt, ...). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.

Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.

+ flashing then fixed, The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured.
accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels. qualified workshop.

46

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

3
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Door(s) open fixed, associated with A door or the boot is still open. Close the door or boot.
a message identifying
the door, if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).

fixed, associated with a


message identifying the
door, and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).

Seat belt(s) fixed then flashing A seat belt has not been fastened or Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
not fastened / accompanied by an has been unfastened.
unfastened increasing audible
signal.

Airbags on temporarily. This lamp comes on for a This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
few seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
ignition, then goes off. qualified workshop.

fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
pretensioner systems has a fault. workshop.

47

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Left-hand Flashing with audible The lighting stalk has been pushed When changing lane.
direction signal. down.
indicator
Right-hand Flashing with audible The lighting stalk has been pushed
direction signal. up.
indicator
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting control stalk is in the On manual operation of the lighting or in automatic
"Sidelamps" position. mode.

Dipped beam fixed. The lighting control stalk is at the


headlamps "Dipped beam" position.

Main beam fixed. The lighting control stalk has been Pull the control stalk again to return to dipped beam.
headlamps pulled toward you.

Front fixed. The front foglamps are switched on Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward
foglamps using the ring on the lighting control twice to switch off the front foglamps.
stalk.

Rear fixed. The rear foglamp has been switched Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk to the rear to
foglamp on using the ring on the lighting switch off the rear foglamp.
control stalk.

48

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Library of symbols

Symbols
Overview of all symbols and other markings
used for the instruments and controls.
Trip computer

Stop & Start time counter.


Gearbox

Park position.
3
Visual control selection markings, positioned
either on the dashboard, the control itself, or Remaining driving range. Reverse.
the display screen once activated.

Current or average fuel consumption. Neutral.

Average speed of the vehicle.


Display screen Automatic mode.

Service indicator. Distance travelled by the vehicle.

Manual mode.
Engine oil level indicator.
Unlocking / locking

Gear shift indicator. Unlock the vehicle.


Change up / Change down.

Speed limiter. Lock the vehicle.

Sport programme.
Cruise control. Central locking.

Alarm/Deactivate volumetric
monitoring.

49

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Driving Lighting Safety

Activate Park Assist. Switch dipped or main beam on. Activate the passenger's airbag.

Deactivate parking sensors. Switch front and rear foglamps on. Deactivate the passenger's airbag.

Deactivate Stop & Start. Headlamp beam adjustment. Switch the electric child lock on.

Reinitialise under-inflation detection. Touch screen Start an assistance call.

Access to the touch screen menu. Start an emergency call.


Deactivate the DSC/ASR system.

Switch hazard warning lamps on.


Comfort Access to the navigation function.

Steering wheel
Heated seats control. Access to radio and media functions.

Mute on / off.
Demist - defrost the rear screen and
Access to the settings menu.
door mirrors.
Change audio source.
Demist - defrost the windscreen and
Access to the Internet function.
side windows.
Start / end call.

Intermittent rear wiper. Access to the telephone function. Display the list of stations and/or
albums/tracks.

Access to driving settings. Access to preset stations / Confirm.

50

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Engine coolant

3
temperature
Operation Checking the level Level
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature
and pressure in the cooling system increase. The coolant level should be close
To top up the level: to the "MAX" mark but should never
F wait at least one hour for the engine to exceed it.
cool,
F unscrew the cap two turns to allow the When the engine is warm, the temperature of
pressure to drop, the coolant is regulated by the fan.
F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap, The cooling fan may start after
F top up the level to the "MAX" mark. switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
be caught by the fan blades.
With the engine running, when the needle is:
- in zone A, the temperature of the engine
coolant is correct, Be aware of the risk of burns when
- in zone B, the temperature of the engine topping up the cooling system. Do not
coolant is too high; the maximum fill above the maximum level (indicated
temperature and the central STOP warning on the header tank).
Changing the coolant
lamps come on, accompanied by an The coolant does not have to be replaced at
audible signal and a warning message in routine services.
the screen.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe
Fluid specification
to do so. The coolant must conform to the
Wait a few minutes before switching off the manufacturer's recommendations.
engine.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

51

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Instrument panel dimmer


System for the manual adjustment of the
brightness of the instrument panel and the
touch screen to suit the ambient light level.

Operation
Two buttons One button
With the exterior lighting on:
F Press this button to
F Press this button to adjust the brightness,
increase the brightness.

F release the button when the desired level is


F Press this button to reached.
reduce the brightness.

With the vehicle lighting off or in day


As soon as the lighting reaches the required
mode (daytime running lamps on),
level of brightness, release the button.
pressing the button has no effect.

52

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Advice
General operation
It gives access to:
Recommendations
It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for
3
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving
functions and systems, the map...).
- audio and display configuration menus, A light wipe is not enough.
- audio system and telephone controls and The screen does not recognise pressing with
the display of associated information. more than one finger.
This technology allows use at all temperatures
and when wearing gloves.
Touch screen Do not use pointed objects on the touch
And, depending on equipment, it allows: screen.
Adjustment - the display of alert messages and the Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
visual parking sensors information, Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch
F Press MENU to display the "MAIN - access to the controls for the navigation screen.
MENU". system and Internet services, and the
display of associated information.

F Select "Settings".
State of indicator lamps
Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that
As a safety measure, the driver
F Select "Secondary page". gives the state of the corresponding function.
should only carry out operations
Green indicator: you have switched on the
that require close attention, with the
corresponding function.
vehicle stationary.
F Select "Screen settings". Orange indicator: you have switched off the
Some functions are not accessible
corresponding function.
when driving.
F Adjust the brightness by moving the cursor.

53

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Servicing

Principle
Compared to the intervals given in the
manufacturer's service schedule, this is a
countdown related to the interval.
The vehicle's odometer is displayed in area A - it remains displayed if the service is
of the display screen and the trip recorder in overdue,
It is calculated from the last reset of area B. The service indicator does not appear if it is
the service indicator, according to the more than 2 000 miles (3 000 km) before the
mileage covered and the time elapsed next service is due.
since the last service. The service indicator appears when
approaching a servicing point:
- it indicates the distance before the next
service is due,
For BlueHDi Diesel versions only - it displays the servicing interval in
(depending on country of sale), the two ways,
degree of deterioration of the engine oil
is also taken into account.

54

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Servicing reminder
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Service overdue
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched
3
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before on, the spanner flashes to indicate that
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the next service is due. the service must be carried out as soon as
the spanner symbolising the service operations For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, possible.
comes on. The distance recorder display line the screen indicates: Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles
indicates the distance remaining before the (300 km).
next service is due. For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain the screen indicates:
before the next service is due.
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
7 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on to
indicate that a service must be carried out 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
soon. the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on.
7 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off; the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The screen then
indicates the total and trip distances.

55

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Service indicator zero reset


For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this Advice
alert is also accompanied by the fixed
illumination of the Service warning
lamp, when the ignition is switched on. Retrieving the service
The distance remaining may be information
weighted by the time factor, depending You can access the service information at any
on the driving conditions. time.
Therefore, the spanner may also come F Press the trip distance recorder zero reset
on if you have exceeded the period button.
since the last service, indicated in the The service information is displayed for a
manufacturer's service schedule. few seconds, then disappears.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the After each service, the service indicator must
spanner can also come on early, be reset to zero.
according to the degree of deterioration If you have carried out the service on your
of the engine oil. The deterioration vehicle yourself: Trip recorder reset
of the engine oil depends on the F switch off the ignition,
conditions in which the vehicle is used. F press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.

Following this operation, if you wish to


disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle With the trip mileage displayed, press the
and wait at least five minutes for the button for a few seconds.
zero reset to be registered.

56

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Oil level
Principle
Dipstick
Advice
Take car when working under the
bonnet, as some parts of the engine
3
Checking
Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the can be very hot (risk of burns) and the
F Open the bonnet and secure it with the
dipstick and the oil filler cap on your engine. cooling fan can start at any time (even
stay.
There are 2 marks on the dipstick: with the ignition switched off).
F Pull the dipstick out and wipe it with a clean
If a level is found to be very low, have
cloth.
the corresponding system checked
F Return the dipstick to its tube and then pull
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
it out again to check the level against the
workshop.
mark.
A check of the engine oil level is only
F Return the dipstick to its tube.
- A = max; never exceed this valid if the vehicle is on level ground
level, and the engine has been off for at least
- B = min; top up the level via Low oil level 30 minutes.
the oil filler cap, using the Oil grade: the oil used must meet
F Identify the engine oil filler cap.
grade of oil suited to your the specification given in the
F Open the filler cap.
engine. manufacturer's servicing and warranty
F Add engine oil with exceeding mark A.
booklet.
F Fit the filler cap.

57

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Electronic oil level indicator


The check is done for a few seconds on
switching on the ignition with a message in the
display or screen (depending on version).
It is only valid if the vehicle is on level ground
and the engine has been off for at least
Level correct Fault
30 minutes. This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL_ _" or
by the display of a dedicated message in the
instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
It is normal to top-up the engine oil
level between services (or oil changes).
PEUGEOT recommends that you check Level incorrect
the oil level and top-up if necessary,
This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL" or
every 3 000 miles (5 000 km).
by the display of a dedicated message in the
instrument panel.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
avoid damage to the engine.

58

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Gear shift indicator

Principle On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox,


3
System which reduces fuel consumption by the arrow may be accompanied by the
recommending the most appropriate gear. gear recommended.

The information appears in the instrument


Operation panel in the form of an arrow. It may be The system adapts its gear change
Depending on the driving situation and your accompanied by a recommended gear. recommendation according to the
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can the demands of the driver (power,
follow this instruction without engaging the acceleration, braking, ...).
intermediate gears. The system never suggests:
The gear engagement recommendations must - engaging first gear,
not be considered compulsory. This is because - engaging reverse gear.
the configuration of the road, the amount of
traffic and safety remain determining factors
when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the
driver remains responsible for deciding whether
or not to follow the indications given.
This function cannot be deactivated.

With an electronic or automatic


gearbox, the system is only active in
manual mode.

59

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Indicators

Energy load
Load reduction mode Economy mode

Principle Principle Entry into the mode


System which manages the use of certain System which manages the period of use of Once this time has elapsed, a message
functions according to the level of charge certain functions to maintain an adequate state advising the entry into energy economy mode
remaining in the battery. of charge of the battery. appears in the screen and the active functions
When the vehicle is being driven, the load After switching off the engine and for a on put on standby.
reduction function temporarily deactivates maximum cumulative period of around If a telephone call is in progress at this time,
certain functions, such as the air conditioning, 30 minutes, you can continue to use functions the connection via the audio system's hands-
the heated rear screen... such as the audio and telematic system, the free function will be maintained for around
The deactivated functions are reactivated wipers, dipped beam, courtesy lamps, ... 10 minutes.
automatically as soon as conditions permit.

Coming out of the mode


These functions will be automatically restored
the next time the vehicle is used.
To restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and allow it run
for at least five minutes.

The engine will not start if the battery is


discharged.

60

208_en_Chap03_Indicateurs_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

PEUGEOT i-Cockpit

Adjustment Adjusting the steering


To benefit from the ergonomics of the wheel
Peugeot i-Cockpit, carry out these F When stationary, pull the control lever
adjustments in the following order: to release the steering wheel adjustment
- height of the head restraint, mechanism.
- backrest angle, F Adjust the height and reach of the wheel to
- seat height, suit your driving position.
- longitudinal position of the seat, F Push the control lever to lock the steering
- reach and then height of the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
wheel,
- interior and door mirrors.
Once these adjustments have been made, As a safety measure, this operation
ensure that from your driving position you can must only be carried out with the
see the "head-up" instrument panel clearly, vehicle stationary.
over the reduced diameter steering wheel.

61

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Front seats
Standard
Adjustment
Forwards-backwards Height Backrest

F Raise the control and slide the seat F Pull the control upwards to raise or push F Push the control rearwards.
forwards or backwards. it downwards to lower, as many times as
required, to obtain the position required.

62

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Head restraints
4
The head restraint has a frame with Before moving the seat backwards,
notches which prevent it from lowering; ensure that there is nothing that might
this is a safety device in case of impact. prevent the full travel of the seat, so
The adjustment is correct when the as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
upper edge of the head restraint is seat caused by the presence of objects
level with the top of the head. on the floor behind the seat or rear
Never drive with the head restraints passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
removed; they must be in place and movement immediately.
adjusted correctly.

F To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards.


F To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the
openings, keeping them in line with the
seat back.
F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
and the head restraint at the same time.

63

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Bucket seats
Adjustment
Forwards-backwards Height Backrest

F Lift the control and slide the seat forwards F Pull the handle upwards to raise or push F Push the handle towards the rear and
or backwards. it downwards to lower, as many times as move the seat backrest forwards or
necessary to obtain the required position. backwards.

64

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Additional adjustments
4
Heated seats Armrest
With the engine running, the front seats can be Comfort and storage system for the driver and
heated separately. front passenger.

F Use the adjustment wheel, select the level Cover with opening lever Storage space in the console
of heating required: F Lift the lever to raise the lid. F Pull the armrest fully up.
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.

65

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

One-piece rear seats


Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and
folding one-piece backrest.

Backrest

Folding the backrest Raising the seat backrest


F Move the front seats forward if necessary. F Release the seat backrest 2 by press both F Raise the seat backrest 2.
F Position the outer seat belts on the controls 1 simultaneously. F Latch the backrest in place, the red
backrest and buckle them. F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the fixed indicators on the controls 1 are no longer
F Lower the head restraints to the lowest cushion. visible.
position. F Unbuckle and return the outer seat belts to
their normal positions ready for use.

66

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

2/3 - 1/3 split rear seats

4
Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and
split backrest (left hand 2/3, right hand 1/3)
Head restraints which can be folded individually to adapt the
These have one position for use (up) and a load space in the boot.
stowed position (down).
Seat backrest

They can be removed and are interchangeable


side to side. Folding the backrest
To remove a head restraint: F Move the corresponding front seat forward F Release the backrest by pressing control 1
F pull the head restraint fully up, if necessary. for the seat backrest 2.
F then, press the lug A. F Position the corresponding outer seat belt F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the fixed cushion.
against the backrest and buckle it. The rear cushion is not removable.
F Fully lower or remove the head restraint.

67

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Repositioning the seat backrest Head restraints When folding the seat, the centre seat
These have one position for use (up) and a belt should not be fastened, but laid out
stowed position (down). flat on the seat.

Never drive with the head restraints


removed; they must be fitted and
correctly adjusted.

When repositioning the seat backrest,


take care not to trap the seat belts.

F Raise the seat backrest 2.


F Secure it, checking that the red indicator in
They can be removed and are interchangeable
the control 1 is no longer visible.
side to side. The rear seat cushion does not fold,
F Unbuckle and reposition the seat belts
To remove a head restraint: just the seat backrest can be folded to
ready for use.
F pull the head restraint fully up, increase the boot loading space.
F Refit the head restraint(s).
F then, press the lug A.

68

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Ventilation
General points

Air intake Control panel


4
The air circulating in the passenger The controls of this system are grouped
compartment is filtered and originates either together on the control panel on the centre
from the outside via the grille located at the console.
base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.

Air intake flow Air distribution


The incoming air follows various paths The incoming air is distributed via various
depending on the controls selected by the outlets:
driver: - windscreen demisting-defrosting vents,
- direct arrival in the passenger - front side window demisting-defrosting
compartment (air intake), vents,
- passage through a heating circuit (heating), - side adjustable air vents,
- passage through a cooling circuit (air - central adjustable air vents,
conditioning). - air outlets to the front footwells,
- air outlets to the rear footwells.

69

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Advice
In order for the ventilation and air conditioning to be fully effective, follow the operation and If after an extended stop in sunshine,
maintenance guidelines below: the interior temperature is very high, first
F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles ventilate the passenger compartment for
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well a few moments.
as the air extractor located in the boot. Put the air flow control at a setting high
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation enough to quickly change the air in the
of the air conditioning system. passenger compartment.
F The air conditioning system only works with the engine running. The air conditioning system does not
F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month contain chlorine and does not present
to keep it in perfect working order. any danger to the ozone layer.
F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its The condensation created by the air
special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the conditioning results in a discharge
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic of water under the vehicle which is
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). perfectly normal.
F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have
it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record.
F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or Passenger compartment filter
a qualified workshop. Depending on the environment (e.g.
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the dusty atmosphere) and the use of the
air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability. vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace it
twice as often if necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
have an adverse effect on the performance
Stop & Start of the air conditioning system and generate
The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain undesirable odours.
a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule.
the Stop & Start system (see the corresponding section).

70

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Advice
Interior settings

Heating or Manual air conditioning


4
I require... Recirculation of interior air /
Air distribution Air flow Temperature Manual AC
Intake of exterior air

HOT

COLD

DEMISTING
DEFROSTING

Digital air conditioning: use the automatic mode in preference by pressing the "AUTO" button.

71

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Demist - defrost

Windscreen Manual air conditioning Dual-zone digital air conditioning


Operation Switching on Auto - Visibility programme
These markings on the control panel F Put the air flow, temperature Switching on
indicate the control positions for and distribution controls to the
rapid demisting or defrosting of the dedicated marked position. F Press the "visibility" button to
windscreen and side windows. demist or defrost the windscreen
and side windows as quickly as
possible.
F Press the "A/C" button for air
conditioning; the indicator lamp The system automatically manages the air
in the button comes on. conditioning, air flow and air intake, and
provides optimum distribution towards the
windscreen and side windows.

Switching off Switching off

F Press the "A/C" button again; F Press the "visibility" button


the indicator lamp in the button again or on "AUTO"; the
goes off. indicator lamp in the button goes
off and the indicator lamp in the
"AUTO" button comes on.
The system reverts to the previous settings.

With Stop & Start, when demisting has


been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.

72

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Rear screen
Operation
Door mirrors
Demisting - Defrosting
Advice
4
F Switch off the demisting/defrosting
The control button is located on the To demist or defrost the electric door
of the rear screen and electric door
air conditioning system control panel. mirrors, with the engine running
mirrors as soon as appropriate, as
press the heated rear window switch.
lower current consumption results
The rear screen demisting/defrosting can only in reduced fuel consumption.
operate when the engine is running.

Switching on
F Press this button to demist/defrost the rear
screen and (depending on version) the
electric door mirrors. The indicator lamp
associated with the button comes on.

Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off
automatically to prevent an excessive
consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demisting/
defrosting operation before it is switched
off automatically by pressing the button
again. The indicator lamp associated with
the button goes off.

73

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Heating / Ventilation
Manual mode

Temperature Air flow If you place the air flow control at


F Turn the knob from blue F Turn the knob from position 1 to position 0 (off), the temperature in the
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust the position 6, to obtain the desired vehicle will no longer be maintained.
temperature to your wishes. air flow. However, a slight flow of air can still be
felt due to the movement of the vehicle.

74

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Adjusting the air distribution


Windscreen and side windows.
Air intake / Air recirculation
Recirculation of the air in the vehicle isolates
the passenger compartment from exterior
odours and fumes.
4
Windscreen, side windows and Return to the intake of exterior air as soon as
footwells. possible to avoid the risk of deterioration of air
quality and misting.
Footwells.
F Press the button to recirculate
the interior air: the indicator lamp
is on.
Centre and side air vents.
F Press the button again to allow the intake
of exterior air: the indicator lamp is off.

The air distribution can be


modulated by placing the knob at an
intermediate position.

75

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Air conditioning
Manual mode

Temperature Air flow If you put the air flow control in


position 0 (system off), the temperature
F To adjust the temperature, urn F To adjust the air flow, turn
is no longer controlled. However,
the knob from blue (cold) to red the knob from position 1 to
a slight flow of air can still be felt,
(hot) to suit your requirements. position 6 to obtain a adequate
resulting from the movement of the
air flow for your comfort.
vehicle.

76

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Air distribution adjustment


Windscreen and side windows.
Air intake / Air recirculation

The recirculation of interior air insulates the


passenger compartment from exterior odours
and smoke.
Air conditioning On / Off

The air conditioning is designed to


operate effectively in all seasons,
with the windows closed.
4
Windscreen, side windows and
Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible
footwells. It enables you to:
to prevent deterioration of the air quality and
the formation of mist. - lower the temperature, in summer,
Footwells. - increase the effectiveness of the demisting
F Press the button to recirculate
in winter, above 3 °C.
the interior air: the indicator lamp
is on. Switching on
Central and side vents.
F Press the button again to allow fresh air F Press the "A/C" button, the button's
into the passenger compartment: the indicator lamp comes on.
indicator lamp is off.
The air distribution can be adapted The air conditioning does not operate
by placing the dial in an intermediate when the air flow adjustment control is
position. in position "0".

To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use


recirculation of interior air for a few moments.
Then return to fresh air intake.

Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again, the button's
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may affect comfort levels
(humidity, condensation).

77

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Dual-zone digital A/C When the engine is cold, the air flow will
only reach its optimum level gradually
AUTO mode to prevent too great a distribution of
cold air.
Automatic programme In cold weather, it favours the
distribution of warm air to the
windscreen, the side windows and the
footwells only.

Temperature
Adjustment
The driver and front passenger can each set
the temperature to suit their requirements.
The value indicated in the screen corresponds
Principle Provides soft and quiet operation by
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
limiting air flow.
Switching on degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.

F Press the "AUTO" button


Offers the best compromise between
repeatedly. The indicator lamp F Push the button down (blue) to
a comfortable temperature and quiet
comes on at the first press; the reduce the value or up (red) to
operation.
mode activated appears in the increase it.
digital air conditioning screen: Provides strong and effective air flow.

A setting around 21 enables you to obtain an


optimum level of comfort. Depending on your
Switching off requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
usual.
F Press the "empty fan" air flow
In addition, it is recommended that you avoid a
button until the fan symbol
left/right setting difference of more than 3.
disappears.

78

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

On entering the vehicle, if the interior

4
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort value, there is no need
to alter the value displayed in order to
obtain the required level of comfort. Air conditioning
The system corrects the temperature
difference automatically and as quickly The air conditioning is designed to
as possible. operate efficiently in all seasons, with
the windows closed.
It allows you:
Auto - Visibility programme F Press the "AUTO" button again - in summer, to lower the temperature,
to return to the automatic comfort - in winter, above 3 °C, to improve demisting.
Switching on
programme.
F Press the "visibility" button for
faster demisting or defrosting For maximum cooling or heating of Switching on
of the windscreen and side the passenger compartment, you can F Press the "A/C" button, the associated
windows. exceed the minimum value of 14 or the indicator lamp comes on.
The system automatically manages the air maximum value of 28. The air conditioning cannot operate when the
conditioning, and the air intake, flow and air flow is set to off.
distribution to the windscreen and side F Push the button down
windows to the best effect. until "LO" is displayed or
up until "HI" is displayed.
Switching off
Switching off F Press the "A/C" button again; the
associated indicator lamp goes off.
F Press the "visibility" button Switching off may cause some problems
again or the "AUTO" button, the (humidity, misting).
indicator lamp in the button goes
off and the indicator lamp in the
"AUTO" button comes on.
The system reverts to the previous settings
used.

79

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Manual mode
Air distribution Air intake/Air recirculation Depending on your requirements, you can
make a different selection from that offered by
F Press this button several times in Switching on the system by changing a setting. The other
succession to direct the air flow functions will still be controlled automatically.
in turn towards: F Press this button to recirculate When you modify a setting, the indicator lamp
the interior air. The indicator in the "AUTO" button goes off.
- the windscreen, the side windows and the lamp in the button comes on and
footwells, the air recirculation symbol is
- the windscreen and side windows displayed. Switching the system off
(demisting or defrosting), Air recirculation prevents exterior odours
F Press the "empty fan" air flow
- the central and side vents, and fumes from entering the passenger
button until the fan symbol
- the central vents, the side vents and the compartment. It is activated automatically when
disappears and "---" appears.
footwells, operating the screen wash.
- the footwells.
Switching off This action switches off all of the functions of
F As soon as possible, press this button the air conditioning system.
Air flow again to permit the intake of exterior air and The temperature is no longer maintained at a
prevent misting. The indicator lamp in the comfortable level. However, a slight flow of air,
F Press this "full fan" button to
button goes off. due to the movement of the vehicle, can still
increase the air flow.
be felt.

The air flow symbol (a fan) appears in the Avoid prolonged operation in interior air
screen. It is filled in progressively in relation to Avoid driving for too long with the
recirculation mode (risk of misting and
the value required. system switched off (risk of misting and
of deterioration of the air quality).
of deterioration of the air quality).
F Press this "empty fan" button to Pressing the "full fan" button
reduce the air flow. reactivates the system with the settings
prior to deactivation.

80

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Window controls
Mode Automatic mode
(depending on version)

Open
Anti-pinch
(depending on version)
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
4
Press the control, going past the point of In the event of unwanted opening of the window
resistance. The window opens completely after when closing automatically, press the control
releasing the control. Pressing again stops the until the window opens completely, then pull
movement of the window. the control immediately until the window closes.
Continue to hold the control for approximately
one second after the window has closed.
Close
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
Pull the control, going past the point of during this operation.
resistance. The window closes completely after
Control releasing the control. Pulling again stops the
movement of the window.
Open
Press the control without going past
the point of resistance. The window
stops as soon as the control is
released.
The electric window controls remain
Close operational for approximately one
Pull the control without going past the point of minute after the key has been removed.
resistance. The window stops as soon as the Once this time has elapsed, the electric
control is released. windows will not operate. To reactivate
them, switch the ignition on again.

Inhibit the rear controls.

81

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Inhibition Advice Always remove the key when leaving


the vehicle, even for a short time.
For the safety of your children, press In the event of contact during operation
the control to prevent operation Reinitialisation of the windows, you must reverse the
of the windows of the rear doors, Following reconnection of the battery, the movement of the window. To do this,
irrespective of their position. safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. press the switch concerned.
The safety anti-pinch is not active during these When operating the passenger electric
With the warning lamp on, the rear switches operations: window controls, the driver must ensure
are deactivated. With the warning lamp off, the - lower the window completely, then raise that no one prevents the correct closing
switches are active. it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres of the windows.
each time the switch is pressed. Repeat The driver must ensure that passengers
the operation until the window closes use the electric windows correctly.
completely, Be aware of children when operating
- press and hold the switch upwards for the windows.
at least one second after reaching this
position, window closed.

82

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Wipers
Front
Manual mode
The wipers are controlled directly by the driver. Wipe
4
Fast (heavy rain).

Normal (moderate rain).

Intermittent (proportional to the


speed of the vehicle).

Park.

Single wipe (press down and


release).

83

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

AUTO mode
Operation
The windscreen wipers
Single wipe
operate automatically, Pull the stalk briefly towards you.
without any action on the
part of the driver, when
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of The automatic rain sensitive windscreen
the rainfall. wipers must be reactivated by pushing
the control stalk downwards, if the
ignition has been off for more than
one minute.

Unusual operation
If the wipers operate in intermittent mode when
in AUTO mode, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with


Switching on Switching off the sunshine sensor and located in the
Briefly push the control stalk downwards. Briefly push the control stalk downwards again, centre of the windscreen behind the
A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has or place the control stalk in another position rear view mirror.
been accepted. (Int, 1 or 2). Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wipers when using an automatic car wash.
This warning lamp comes on in the This warning lamp goes off in the In winter, it is advisable to wait until
instrument panel and a message is instrument panel and a message is the windscreen is completely clear of
displayed. displayed. ice before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.

84

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Rear Reverse gear Windscreen wash

4
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper Pull the wiper stalk towards you. The
will come into operation if the windscreen windscreen wash, then the windscreen wipers,
wipers are operating. operate for a pre-determined time.

Configuration
Switching on

Press "MENU" to display the "MAIN


MENU".

Select "Driving".
Rear wiper selection ring:

Park.
Select "Secondary page".

Intermittent wipe.
Select "Vehicle settings".

Wash-wipe (set duration). Select the "Driving assistance" tab.

Activate the "Auto rear wiper in


If a significant accumulation of snow or reverse" function.
ice is present, or when using a bicycle
carrier on the boot, deactivate the This function is activated by default.
automatic rear wiper via the vehicle Switching off
configuration menu. Deactivate the "Auto rear wiper in reverse"
function.

85

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Advice
Screenwash reservoir Maintenance
Removing a wiper blade
F Lift the corresponding wiper arm away from
the windscreen.
F Unclip and remove the blade.

Fitting the new wiper blade


F Position and clip the new blade to the arm.
This position allows the wiper blades to be
F Carefully lower the wiper arm.
Top up the level when necessary. moved away from the windscreen.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
Open the bonnet and secure it with the stay. detach the blades from the windscreen.
Identify the blue reservoir filler cap.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
Open the blue filler cap.
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
Pour in screenwash fluid for optimum cleaning.
- handle them with care,
To move the wiper blades to the vertical position:
- clean them regularly using soapy
F Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
water,
after switching off the ignition places the
Fluid specification blades vertically on the screen.
- avoid using them to retain
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, cardboard on the windscreen,
this fluid must not be topped up or replaced - replace them at the first signs of
with plain water. To return them to the park position: wear.
In wintry conditions, it is recommended that you F Switch on the ignition and operate the
use an ethyl alcohol or methanol based fluid. wiper stalk.

86

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Carrying children
General points
Although one of PEUGEOT main criteria when
designing your vehicle, the safety of your
children also depends on you.
4
For maximum safety, please observe the
PEUGEOT recommends that children
following recommendations:
should travel in the outer rear seats of
- in accordance with European regulations,
your vehicle:
all children under the age of 12 or less
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
than one and a half metres tall must
- forward facing over the age of 3.
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.

* The regulations on carrying children are


specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
87

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

At the front*

Rearward facing Forward facing Passenger seat


When a rearward facing child seat is installed When a forward facing child seat is installed on Adjustment
on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's Seat fully back.
to the fully back and highest position, with the seat to the fully back and highest position Seat in the highest position.
backrest straightened. with seat backrest straightened and leave the
The passenger airbag must be deactivated. passenger's airbag activated.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate.

Ensure that the seat belt is correctly


tensioned.
Ensure that the child seat is not in
contact with a part of the vehicle other
* Consult the legislation in force in your country than the passenger seat.
before installing your child on this seat.
88

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Deactivating the passenger's


front airbag
Never install a rearward facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by
Passenger airbag OFF
4
an active front airbag. This could cause
the death of the child or serious injury.

The warning label present on both sides of the


passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In
line with current legislation, the following tables
contain this warning in all of the languages
required.

Only the passenger's front airbag can be


deactivated.
F With the ignition off, introduce the key into
the passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the "OFF" position.
F Remove the key, leaving the switch in this
position.
When the ignition is on, this warning
lamp comes on in the instrument
panel and stays on while the airbag is
deactivated.

89

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

AR
BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der
Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage “seljaga sõidusuunas“ lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD.
Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.

90

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla

4
NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
SL NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.

91

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

At the rear

Rearward facing Forward facing Centre rear seat


When a rearward facing child seat is installed When a forward facing child seat is installed A child seat with a support leg must never be
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
front seat forward and straighten the backrest front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the rearward facing child seat does not so that the legs of the child in the forward
touch the vehicle's front seat. facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.

Remove and stow the head restraint Ensure that the seat belt is correctly The incorrect installation of a child seat
before installing a child seat with tensioned. in a vehicle compromises the protection
backrest on a passenger seat. For child seats with a support leg, of the child in the event of an accident.
Refit the head restraint once the child ensure that this is in firm contact with
seat has been removed. the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.

92

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Secured by a 3-point seat belt


PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat
belt.
4
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearward facing position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the booster is used on its own.

L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.

93

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Locations for child seats


Child seats secured with the seat belt
In accordance with the European regulation, this table indicates the options for the installation of child seats secured using the seat belt and universally
approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg


Seat (groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Up to 1 year approx From 1 to 3 years approx From 3 to 6 years approx From 6 to 10 years approx

Front passenger seat (c), (e)

- with height adjustment U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)

- without height adjustment U* U* U* U*

Outer rear seats (d) U U U U

Centre rear seat (d) U (f) U (f) U U

94

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

U: seat suitable for the installation of a child


seat secured using the seat belt and
universally approved rearward facing and/or
(a) universal child seat: child seat which can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats
4
forward facing. and "car cots" cannot be installed on the
U(R): as for U, the vehicle seat must be front passenger seat.
adjusted to the highest and fully back (c) consult the legislation in force in your
position. country before installing your child on this
U*: as for U, straightening the backrest. seat.
(d) to install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward or forward facing, move the front
seat forward, then straighten the backrest to
allow enough room for the child seat and the
child's legs.
(e) When a rearward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat, the
passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
When a forward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, the passenger's
airbag must remain activate.
(f) A
 child seat with support leg must never be
installed on this passenger seat.

95

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left
with the latest ISOFIX regulation. hand rear seat, before fitting the seat, first
The seats, represented below, are fitted with move the centre rear seat belt towards the
regulation ISOFIX mountings: middle of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat
interfering with the operation of the seat belt.

The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two


latches which are secured on the two rings A.

Some seats also have an upper strap, known


as the Top Tether, which is attached to ring B.

- a ring B behind the seat for fixing the upper To secure the child seat to the top tether:
strap, referred to as the Top Tether. - remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat in this seating
position (refit it once the child seat has
been removed),
The Top Tether is used to secure the upper - pass the upper strap of the child seat
strap of child seats that have one. This over the top of the seat backrest, centred
arrangement limits the forward tipping of the between the apertures for the head
child seat in the event of a front impact. restraint rods,
There are three rings for each seat: - fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B,
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
- two rings A, hidden between the padding of - tighten the upper strap.
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle seat backrest and cushion, directly
vehicle.
below the "ISOFIX" label,

96

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Recommended seats

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its Baby-Safe Plus ISOFIX base" (size category: E)
4
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A.
The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.
This seat can be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached
to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.

Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A.
The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be used forward facing.
This seat can not be secured with a seat belt.
We recommend that you use the seat in the rearward facing position up to the age of 3 years.

Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.

97

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Is installed in the forward facing position.


Is attached to the rings A and the upper ring B, referred to as the Top Tether,
using an upper strap.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down.

This seat can be used on seats not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle's seat using the three-point seat belt.
Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.

FAIR G 0/1 S and its base RWF B ISOFIX (size category C)

Group 0+ and 1: from birth to 18 kg

Is installed rearward facing.


Is installed using an ISOFIX base attached to the rings A.
6 seat body angles.
Use the type B ISOFIX base rearward facing (RWF).
This child seat can also be used in the forward facing position on seating positions
not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, the child seat body must be attached to the seat of the vehicle by
the three point seat belt.

Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.

98

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Locations

4
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Less than 13 kg
Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to approx. 1 year

Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat rearward facing rearward facing forward facing

ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1

Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX

IUF
Outer rear seats X IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU* IL-SU
IL-SU

Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing secured using the Remove and stow the head restraint
upper strap. before installing a child seat on a
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either: passenger seat.
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg, Refit the head restraint once the child
- forward facing fitted with a support leg, seat has been removed.
- an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
For advice on securing the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" section.
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat for the weight group indicated.

* Vehicle seat in a particular position: move the seats in front of the child forward.
99

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a For optimum installation of the forward facing Installing a booster seat
vehicle compromises the child's protection in child seat, ensure that the back of the child
the event of an accident. seat is as close as possible to the backrest
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible. The chest part of the seat belt must be
buckle under the child seat, as this could You mst remove the head restraint before positioned on the child's shoulder without
destabilise it. installing a child seat with backrest to a touching the neck.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the passenger seat. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
child seat harnesses keeping the slack Ensure that the head restraint is stored or passes correctly over the child's thighs.
relative to the child's body to a minimum, attached securely to prevent it from being PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster
even for short journeys. thrown around the vehicle in the event of seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
When installing a child seat using the seat sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when guide at shoulder level.
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened the child seat is removed.
correctly on the child seat and that it secures
the child seat firmly on the seat of your
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable,
- a child or children alone and
move it forwards if necessary.
At rear seating positions, always leave
Children at the front unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
sufficient space between the front seat and:
The legislation on carrying children on the is exposed to the sun, with the windows
- a rearward facing child seat,
front passenger seat is specific to each closed,
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
country. Refer to the legislation in force in - the keys within reach of children inside
forward facing.
your country. the vehicle.
To do this, move the front seat forwards
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and, if necessary, move its backrest into the
when a rearward facing child seat is installed and rear windows, use the child lock.
upright position.
on the front passenger seat. Take care not to open the rear windows by
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously more than one third.
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. To protect young children from the rays of
the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.

100

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Child lock
Manual operation
Mechanical system to prevent opening of a rear
door using its interior lever.
The control is located on the edge of each rear
Electric operation
Electric system, with the control located at the
front, for locking the rear doors so that they
cannot be opened using their interior controls.
Switching off 4
F With the ignition on, press this button again.
door. The indicator lamp in the button goes off,
accompanied by a message to confirm that the
child lock is off.
This indicator lamp remains off while the child
lock is switched off.

Any other status of the indicator lamp


indicates a fault with the electric child
lock.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.

Locking Switching on This system is independent and in no


F Using the ignition key, turn the red control F With the ignition on, press this button. circumstances does it take the place of
as far as it will go: The indicator lamp in the button comes on, the central locking control.
- to the left on the left-hand rear door, accompanied by a message to confirm that the Check the state of the child lock every
- to the right on the right-hand rear door. child lock is on. time you switch on the ignition.
This indicator lamp remains on until the child Always remove the key from the ignition
lock is switched off. when leaving the vehicle, even for a
Unlocking It is still possible to open the doors from the short time.
F Using the ignition key, turn the red control outside and operate the rear electric windows
as far as it will go: from the driver's control panel.
- to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the left on the right-hand rear door.

101

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Seat belts
At the front

Fastening Height adjustment (5-door)


F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the F To lower the attachment point, squeeze the
The front seat belts are fitted with a buckle. control A and slide it downwards.
pretensioning and force limiting system. F Check that the seat belt is fastened F To raise the attachment point, slide the
This system improves safety in the front correctly by pulling the strap. control A upwards.
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat Unfastening
belts against the body of the occupants. F Press the red button on the buckle.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so
improving their protection.

102

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Warning lamp
At the rear

Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
4
Not fastened / unfastened. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
This warning lamp comes on in the instrument F On the outer seat belts, raise the bar to the
panel when the ignition is switched on. top of the backrest to prevent the tongue
It remains on for a certain time if the front from knocking against the side trim.
passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
Once this period has elapsed, the warning lamp
goes off if the driver's seat belt is fastened.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h)
this warning lamp flashes for two minutes Warning lamp
accompanied by an audible signal of increasing
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point Unfastened.
volume. Once these two minutes have elapsed,
seat belt, with force limiter and, for the outer From approximately 12 mph
this warning lamp remains on until the driver
seats, an effort limiter. (20 km/h) and for two minutes, this
and/or the front passenger fastens their seat
warning lamp flashes, accompanied
belt.
by an audible signal of increasing
volume, when one or more rear
Fastening passengers unfasten their seat belt.
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the Once these two minutes have elapsed, this
buckle. warning lamp remains on until the one or more
F Check that the seat belt is fastened rear passengers fasten their seat belt.
correctly by pulling the strap.

103

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Recommendations for children
the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
restrained securely before setting off. possible,
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
and a half metres.
always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
journeys. twist,
than one person.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - be used to restrain only one person,
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
they will not fulfil their role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
For more information, refer to the "Child
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel - not be converted or modified to avoid
seats" section.
permitting automatic adjustment of the affecting its performance.
length of the strap to your size. The seat belt In accordance with current safety
is stowed automatically when not in use. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's
Before and after use, ensure that the seat seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with
belt is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a In the event of an impact
The lower part of the strap must be PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Depending on the nature and
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a seriousness of the impact, the
The upper part must be positioned in the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, pretensioning device may be deployed
hollow of the shoulder. particularly if the straps show signs of before and independently of the airbags.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic damage. Deployment of the pretensioners is
locking device which comes into operation in Clean the seat belt straps with soapy accompanied by a slight discharge of
the event of a collision, emergency braking water or a textile cleaning product, sold by harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release PEUGEOT dealers. activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
the device by pulling the strap firmly and After folding or moving a seat or rear bench incorporated in the system.
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
and reeled in correctly. on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

104

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Airbags Front airbags


General information
System designed to contribute towards
improving the safety of the occupants (with
the exception of the rear centre passenger)
4
in the event of violent collisions. The airbags
supplement the action of the seat belts fitted
with force limiters (all except the centre rear
passenger belt).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
System which protects the driver and front
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the occupants
Impact detection zones passenger in the event of a serious front impact
of the vehicle (with the exception of the A. Front impact zone. in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
rear centre passenger); immediately after B. Side impact zone. thorax.
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
of the occupants, Deployment of one or more of the fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in airbags is accompanied by a slight
certain roll-over conditions, the airbags emission of smoke and a noise, due Deployment
may not be deployed; the seat belt to the activation of the pyrotechnic The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's
alone contributes towards ensuring your cartridge incorporated in the system. front airbag if it has been deactivated, in the event
protection in these situations. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive of a serious front impact to all or part of the front
The airbags do not operate when the individuals may experience slight impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the
ignition is switched off. irritation. vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the
The noise of detonation related to the front to the rear of the vehicle.
This equipment will only deploy once.
deployment of one or more airbags may The front airbag inflates between the thorax and
If a second impact occurs (during the
result in a slight loss of hearing for a head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
same or a subsequent accident), the
short time. steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard,
airbag will not be deployed again.
passenger's side to cushion their forward
movement.
105

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by an
audible warning and a message in the
screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop without delay
to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in
the event of a serious impact.
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can be If this warning lamp flashes, contact
deactivated. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
F With the ignition off, insert the key into workshop without delay. The
the passenger airbag deactivation switch. passenger's front airbag may no
F Turn it to the "OFF" position. longer be deployed in the event of a
F Remove the key keeping the switch in the serious impact.
new position.

When the ignition is on, this warning In the event of a fault, identified by the
lamp comes on in the instrument illumination of at least one of the two
panel while the airbag is deactivated. airbag warning lamps, do not install a
passenger (adult or child) at the front.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
Reactivation or qualified workshop.

When you remove the rearward facing child


seat, with the ignition on, turn the switch to
the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and
so assure the safety of your front passenger in
the event of an impact.

106

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Lateral airbags
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
4
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

System which protects the driver and front Impact detection zones Operating fault
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
A. Front impact zone. If this warning lamp comes on in the
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest,
B. Side impact zone. instrument panel, accompanied by
between the hip and the shoulder.
an audible signal and a message
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
in the screen, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
frame, door side.
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked. The airbags may no longer be
Deployment Curtain airbags deployed in the event of a serious impact.
A lateral airbag is deployed unilaterally in the System which contributes towards improving
event of a serious side impact applied to all or the protection of the driver and passengers
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular (with the exception of the rear centre In the event of a minor impact or bump
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a passenger) in the event of a serious side on the side of the vehicle or if the
horizontal plane and directed from the outside impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
towards the inside of the vehicle. side of the head. deployed.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and In the event of a rear or front collision,
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle the upper passenger compartment area. the airbag is not deployed.
and the corresponding door trim panel.
107

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Comfort

Guidelines to follow:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Lateral airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Use only approved covers on the seats,
Do not allow anything to come between
spokes or resting your hands on the centre compatible with the deployment the lateral
the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
part of the wheel. airbags. For information on the range of seat
object...), do not attach or fix anything near
Passengers must not place their feet on the covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
to the airbags or their trajectories when
dashboard. contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
inflating as this could cause injuries when
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags Refer to the "Accessories" section.
the airbags are deployed.
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
Never modify the original definition of your
cigarette or pipe. backs (clothing...). This could cause injury
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is
around the airbags.
hit it violently. deployed.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
wheel or dashboard, this could cause nearer to the door than necessary.
systems checked.
injuries with deployment of the airbags.
All work on the airbag system must be
carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop. Curtain airbags
Even if all of the precautions mentioned Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor could cause injury to the head if the curtain
burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed.
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few grab handles installed on the roof, they play
milliseconds) then deflates within the same a part in securing the curtain airbags.
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.

108

208_en_Chap04_confort_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Driving recommendations
Observe the driving regulations and remain
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
react at any time to any eventuality.
If you are obliged to drive through water: Important!

Never drive with the parking brake


applied - Risk of overheating and
5
On a long journey, a break every two hours is damage to the braking system!
strongly recommended. Do not park or run the engine when
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate stationary in areas where inflammable
the need to brake and increase the distance substances and materials (dry grass,
from other vehicles. dead leaves...) might come into contact
with the hot exhaust system - Risk of
fire!
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves
that might be generated by other users,
Driving on flooded - deactivate the Stop & Start system,
roads - drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph
We strongly advise against driving on flooded Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
(10 km/h),
roads, as this could cause serious damage with the engine running. If you have
- do not stop and do not switch off the
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the to leave your vehicle with the engine
engine.
electrical systems of your vehicle. running, apply the parking brake
and put the gearbox into neutral or
position N or P, depending on the type
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as of gearbox.
circumstances allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

109

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Mirrors
Door mirrors Interior controls
Manual controls Electric controls
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the blind spot.

Adjustment Adjustment

F Operate the lever in the four directions to F Move control A to the right or to the left to
adjust the angle of the mirror glass. select the corresponding mirror.
F Fold the mirror manually to protect it when F Move control B in all four directions to
the vehicle parked. adjust.
F Unfold it before moving of again. F Return control A to the central position.
They are not fitted with automatic heating. F Pressing the central symbol on control A
folds the mirrors.
F Pressing again unfolds them.

110

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Using the remote control


Adjustment
F Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
to unfold the door mirrors.
Manual rear view mirror Automatic rear view mirror
5
F When locking the vehicle, the mirrors fold
automatically.

If the mirrors are folded using control A,


they will not unfold when the vehicle
is unlocked. It is necessary to press
control A again.

The objects observed are, in reality,


closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to The rear view mirror has two positions: A sensor measuring the light from the rear of
correctly judge the distance of vehicles - day (normal), the vehicle, automatically and progressively
approaching from behind. - night (anti-dazzle). assures the adjustment.
To change from one to the other, push or pull When in reverse, the mirror brightens
the lever on the lower edge of the mirror. automatically.
The automatic folding and unfolding
of the rear view mirrors when using
the remote control can be deactivated
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Fold the mirrors when using an
automatic car wash.
If necessary, it is possible to fold the
mirrors manually.

111

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Gearbox
Manual 5 Manual 6

Procedure Procedure Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle


F Move the gear lever fully to the right to F Move the lever fully to the right to is stationary and the engine is at idle.
engage 5th gear. engage 5th or 6th gear.

As a safety precaution and to facilitate


starting of the engine:
Engaging reverse Engaging reverse gear - always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.

The gear shift indicator is displayed in


the instrument panel.

F Move the gear lever fully to the right then F Press the gear knob trigger and move the
backwards. gear lever to the left then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is
stationary and the engine is at idle.

112

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Electronic 5 Electronic 6
5

R. Reverse. R. Reverse. Steering mounted paddles


N. Neutral. N. Neutral.
A. Automated mode. A. Automated mode.
M. Manual mode. M. Manual mode.

113

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Automated mode Stopping - Moving off on a slope Manual mode


Do not uses the accelerator to hold the vehicle,
Operation
Operation but apply the parking brake.
Manual mode for sequential gear changing.
Automated mode for gear changing without
action by the driver. Stopping - Parking
Place the lever at N and apply the parking F Move the selector lever to M.
brake.
Moving off
F Push the lever forward to
Lever at position N.
change up.
F Press the brake pedal firmly.
F Pull the lever back to change down.

F Start the engine.


F Place the lever at A or R.
Steering mounted paddles
F Release the brake pedal and F Press the back of the "+" paddle to
press the accelerator pedal change up.
progressively. F Press the back of the "-" paddle to change
down.
If the engine does not start: The gear engaged is indicated in the display.
- If N is flashing in the instrument panel,
move the lever to position A then to
position N. You can change from position A to M
- If the message "Foot on the brake" is and from M to A at any time.
displayed, press firmly on the brake pedal.

The A, R or N position of the lever is indicated


in the display.

114

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Creep function
Principle
Only with petrol engines: the vehicle moves
without pressing the accelerator.
Advice
Following disconnection of the battery, you
have to reinitialise the gearbox.
With the ignition on, the
illumination of this warning
lamp and the flashing of AUTO,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the
5
F Switch the ignition on.
screen, indicate a gearbox fault.

Assistance with low-speed AUTO and - appear in the instrument


manoeuvres panel. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
With the engine running at idle, parking brake
released and the lever placed at A, M or R, the F Select position N.
vehicle moves off when your release the brake
pedal. F Press the brake pedal firmly.
It stops on opening the driver's door. Closing
the door, and putting your foot on the brake
or accelerator pedal allows movement of the F Wait around 30 seconds until N or a gear
vehicle again. appears in the instrument panel.

F Release the brake pedal.

The gearbox is operational again.

115

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Automatic 4 Automatic 6 Automated mode


Operation
Automated mode for gear changes without
action by the driver.

Moving off
Parking brake applied.
F Start the engine.
F Lever at position P or N.
P. Park. P. Park.
F Press firmly on the brake pedal.
R. Reverse R. Reverse.
N. Neutral. N. Neutral.
D. Drive - AUTO driving mode. D. Drive - AUTO driving mode.
F Release the parking brake.
S. Sport - More dynamic driving. S. Sport - More dynamic driving.
F Place the selector at D or R.

Display in the instrument panel F Release the brake pedal and


press the accelerator pedal
progressively.
The vehicle then moves off.

When you select a position with the lever,


the corresponding symbol is displayed in the Never leave children unsupervised in
instrument panel. the vehicles when the engine is running.
Foot on the brake warning
Press the brake pedal when this
comes on in the instrument panel.

116

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Advice When the engine is at idle, if position R,

5
D or M is selected with the brakes
F Select position D for automatic
changing of the four gears.
Manual mode released, the vehicle moves on its own
without pressing the accelerator.
Never leave children unsupervised
Operation inside the vehicle when the engine is
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
Manual mode for sequential gear changing. running.
mode, without action by the driver. It
F Move the gear lever to M. Apply the parking brake and select
continuously selects the most suitable gear for
the driving style, the relief of the road and the position P if carrying out a maintenance
load in the vehicle. operation with the engine running.
F Push the lever forward to
For maximum acceleration, without touching change up.
the gear lever, press the accelerator pedal fully
down (kick down). The gearbox changes down F Pull the lever back to change down.
automatically or holds the gear engaged up to
maximum engine speed. Never select position N when the
When braking, the gearbox changes down Steering mounted paddles vehicle is moving.
automatically to provide effective engine Never select positions P or R unless the
F Press the back of the "+" paddle to
braking. vehicle is at a complete stop.
change up.
When you take your foot off the accelerator
F Press the back of the "-" paddle to change
pedal quickly, the gearbox does not change up,
down.
for your improved safety.
The gear engaged is displayed in the screen.
The steering mounted paddles cannot be used If position N is engaged by mistake
to move to position N or R. when moving, take your foot off
the accelerator pedal, then engage
Invalid value position D to accelerate.
This symbol is displayed if a gear When the ambient temperature is
is not properly engaged (selector below -23°C, the engine should be
between two positions). left running at idle for four minutes
after starting, to ensure the correct
You can change from A to M and M to A operation and durability of the engine
at any time. and gearbox.

117

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Sport programme Switching off - Parking With the ignition on, illumination
of this warning lamp,
Operation Before switching off the engine. accompanied by an audible
This special programme completes the F Move the lever to position P or N. signal and an alert message in the screen,
automatic operation of the gearbox in certain F Apply the parking brake. indicates of gearbox fault.
circumstances. F Immobilise the vehicle.

F Press the "S" button once the In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up
engine is running. If the lever is not in position P, a mode by staying in 3rd gear. You may then
message appears in the screen notice a pronounced jerk when changing
The gearbox automatically operates in a way on opening the driver's door or from P to R and from N to R. This jerk does not
best suited to dynamic driving. approximately 45 seconds after present any risk to the gearbox.
S appears in the instrument panel. switching off the ignition. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h) while
F Place the lever at position P; the keeping to local speed limits.
message disappears. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Return to normal automatic workshop as soon as possible.
On flooded roads or when crossing a
operation
ford, drive at walking pace.
F Press the "S" button again at any time to
quit the Sport programme and return to You risk damaging the gearbox:
auto-adaptive mode. F if you press the brake and
accelerator pedals at the same
time,
F if you force the movement of the
lever from position P to another
position with a flat battery.
To reduce fuel consumption during
prolonged stops with the engine running
(traffic jams...), position the gear lever
at N and apply the parking brake.

118

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Parking sensors
Engage reverse
gear
5

An audible signal confirms the activation of the


The audible (front and rear) and visual (rear) system by engaging reverse gear.
parking sensor system consists of proximity The proximity information is indicated by an
sensors, installed in the rear bumper. audible signal which becomes more rapid as
The sensors detect any obstacle which the vehicle approaches the obstacle. Display in the screen
enters its field of operation: person, vehicle, When the distance between the rear of This completes the audible signal by the
tree, fence, behind the vehicle during the the vehicle and the obstacle is less than display of bars in the multifunction screen,
manoeuvre. approximately thirty centimetres, the audible which become closer and closer as the vehicle
Certain objects detected at the beginning of the signal becomes continuous. approaches the obstacle. When very close to
manoeuvre will no longer be detected at the the obstacle, the "Danger" symbol is displayed
end of the manoeuvre due to the blind spots in the screen.
between and below the sensors.
Examples: stake, roadworks cone or pavement
post.

119

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Setting
If this warning lamp comes on
The parking sensor system cannot in
when reverse gear is engaged,
any circumstances replace the need for
accompanied by a message and/
vigilance on the part of the driver.
or an audible signal, a fault has been detected.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop.

Stopping the assistance


Advice
Change to neutral.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the
sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow.
The system will be deactivated automatically
if a trailer is being towed or if a bicycle carrier
Switching off the assistance is fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle
Press; the indicator lamp comes on. carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).
The state of the system is stored when the
vehicle is switched off.

Resuming assistance
Press again; the indicator lamp goes off.

120

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Reversing camera
The reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The image is displayed in the touch screen. 5
The superimposed representation of guide
The reversing camera cannot in any
lines helps with the manoeuvre.
circumstances be a substitute for
They are represented by lines marked "on
vigilance on the part of the driver.
the ground" and do not allow the position of
the vehicle to be determined relative to tall
obstacles (for example: other vehicles, ...).
Some deformation of the image is normal. High pressure jet washing
The reversing camera function may be
completed with parking sensors. When washing your vehicle, do not
direct the lance within 30 cm of the
The blue lines represent the general direction
camera lens.
of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to
the width of your vehicle without the mirrors).
The red lines represent a distance of about
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear Opening the tailgate causes the display
bumper. to disappear.
The green lines represent distances of about
1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your
vehicle's rear bumper.
The turquoise blue curves represent the Clean the reversing camera regularly
maximum turning circle. using a soft, dry cloth.

121

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Park Assist
The system detects a parking space and then
During a manoeuvre the steering wheel The selection of the type of manoeuvre
provides assistance with the parallel parking
turns quickly: do not hold the steering (entering or exiting a parallel parking
manoeuvres.
wheel, do not place your hand between space) prevents a change to STOP
It controls the steering and provides visual and
the spokes of the steering wheel and mode of Stop & Start.
audible information to the driver.
take care with loose and bulky clothing, In STOP mode, this selection restarts
The driver manages the accelerator, brakes,
scarves, handbags... There is a risk of the engine.
gears and the clutch in the case of a manual
injury.
gearbox.

The driver can take back control of the steering


For entry into a parking space (parallel
at any time.
parking) the system does not detect
spaces which are clearly much smaller
or larger than the size of the vehicle.
This "parking assistance" system
is activated automatically during
The Park Assist system cannot in any manoeuvres; it is therefore possible
circumstances replace the need for that a symbol comes on in the screen,
vigilance on the part of the driver. accompanied by an audible signal,
The driver must remain in control of without affecting the manoeuvre.
their vehicle ensuring that the space
remains clear during the manoeuvre.
In some circumstances, the sensors Changing tyre sizes (out-size tyres,
may not detect small obstacles located winter tyres, ...) can interfere with
The system provides assistance in entering and
in their blind spots. the correct operation of the parking
exiting a parking space when parallel parking.
assistance system.

122

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Entering a parallel parking space

5
F When you have identified a free space,
reduce the speed of the vehicle to a
maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h).

F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move your vehicle forward until a new
parking side. message is displayed.

F Position your vehicle before this


space.

F Move forwards alongside the parking F Select reverse and release the steering
To activate the Park Assist system: space at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) wheel.
F Press this control to activate the system. to measure it, keeping at a distance of
The indicator lamp in the control remains off. between 0.5 and 1.5 metres from the row of
parked vehicles.
A message is displayed in the screen. Once measurement is complete, if the space is
F Select the enter parking space manoeuvre. large enough a message indicates that parking
The indicator lamp in the control comes on. is possible.

123

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Exit from a parallel parking space


F When you want to exit from a parallel
parking space, start the engine.

The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. The assisted exit from parking manoeuvre is in
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), continue progress.
the manoeuvres following the information given Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), continue
by the "parking assistance" system, until the the manoeuvres following the information given
With the vehicle stationary, to activate the Park by the "parking assistance" system, until the
end of manoeuvre message is displayed.
Assist system: end of manoeuvre message is displayed.
The indicator lamp in the control goes off,
The manoeuvre is complete once the front
accompanied by a audible signal. F Press this control.
wheels of the vehicle are out of the parking
The indicator lamp in the control remains off.
space.
The indicator lamp in the control goes off,
A message is displayed in the screen. accompanied by a audible signal.
F Select the exit parking space manoeuvre.
The indicator lamp in the control comes on.
F Operate the direction indicator on the exit
from parking side.
The direction indicator warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel throughout
the manoeuvre, whatever the position of
the stalk.
F Select a forward or reverse gear then
release the steering wheel.
The driver takes back control of the vehicle's
The driver takes back control of the vehicle's
steering.
steering.

124

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Deactivation
The system is deactivated automatically:
- on switching off the ignition,
- if the engine stalls,
A message is displayed in the screen.  his warning lamp is displayed
T
in the instrument panel and/or a
message appears in the screen,
5
- if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes accompanied by an audible
of selection of the type of manoeuvre, signal (short beep).
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during The indicator lamp in the control flashes for a
a manoeuvre, few seconds. If the problem occurs while using
- if the road wheel anti-spin regulation (ASR) the system, the indicator lamp goes off.
is triggered,
These warning lamps
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
indicate a fault with the power
stated limit,
steering.
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
steering wheel, The driver then takes back control of the
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
- if the driver presses the Park Assist vehicle's steering.
workshop.
control,
- if correct positioning of the vehicle is not If the lateral distance between your vehicle
possible (too many manoeuvres needed to and the space is too great, the system may
insert or extract the vehicle), Switching off not be able to measure the space.
- if the driver's door is open, Anything projecting beyond the envelope
The system is switched off automatically: of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
- when towing a trailer, taken into account by the Park Assist
obstacle. system during a manoeuvre.
- if the driver's door is opened,
- if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph
(70 km/h). In bad weather and in winter, ensure
To switch the system of for a prolonged period, that the sensors are not covered by
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified road dirt, ice or snow.
If the system is deactivated during a
workshop. In the event of a fault, have the system
manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
it manually to repeat the measurement.
qualified workshop.

125

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Speed limiter Principle


"This is the speed that the driver does not want Registering a limit speed
"LIMIT" to exceed".
The speed setting is selected with the engine
running, stationary or when driving. The
Steering mounted controls minimum speed setting possible is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The vehicle responds to the accelerator until
This can be done without switching the limiter
resistance is felt in the pedal, which signifies
on, but the engine must be running.
that the vehicle has reached the limiter speed
To register a speed higher than the previous
setting.
setting.
However, the limit speed can be exceeded by
pressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point - Press the SET + button.
of resistance; simply release the accelerator
pedal to return to a speed below the limiter
setting.
Setting and operation of the system can be
done stationary with the engine running or A short press increases the setting in steps of
when driving. 1 mph (km/h).
Pressing and holding increases the setting in steps
Operation of 5 mph (km/h).
To register a speed lower than the previous setting.
Selection
- Press the SET - button.
1. Speed limiter mode selection / off.
2. Increase the registered speed setting.
3. Decrease the registered speed setting.
4. Speed limiter On / Pause.
F Place the thumb wheel at the "LIMIT" A short press decreases the setting by
position: the speed limiter mode is selected 1 mph (km/h).
but is not switched on (PAUSE). Pressing and holding decreases the setting in
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on steps of 5 mph (km/h).
in order to set the speed.

126

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Flashing of the speed setting Operating fault

5
On / Pause

A first press on this button switches the speed It flashes: The registered speed is erased, then replaced
limiter on, a second press pauses it (OFF). - after forcing the accelerator pedal past the by three dashes.
point of resistance, Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
- when the limiter cannot prevent the speed dealer or a qualified workshop.
of the vehicle increasing, because of the
Exceeding the registered profile of the road or when going down a
limit speed steep hill,
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed
- under sharp acceleration. Good practice
the registered speed will not have any effect, In no circumstances can the speed
unless you press the pedal firmly past the limiter replace the need to observe
point of resistance. speed limits or the need for vigilance on
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily the part of the driver.
and the registered speed setting flashes, Switching off the function Be aware of the effect of the profile
accompanied by an audible signal. of the road and sharp acceleration,
F Place the thumb wheel at the 0 position or
To return to normal operation of the speed maintaining control of the vehicle at all
switch off the ignition to stop the system.
limiter, reduce the speed of the vehicle to below times.
The last speed registered stays in memory.
the registered speed setting. To avoid any risk of interference below
the pedals:
- ensure that the mat and its fixings
on the floor are positioned correctly,
- do not fit one mat on top of another.

127

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Cruise control
"CRUISE" Operation
Selection
Steering mounted controls Principle
"This is the speed the driver wishes to
maintain".
This driving assistance system for use when
the traffic is flowing, allows a speed set by
the driver to be maintained, except on a steep F Place the thumb wheel at the "CRUISE"
gradient. position: the cruise control mode is
selected but is not switched on (PAUSE).

With a manual gearbox


To be registered or activated, the speed of the
vehicle must be above 25 mph (40 km/h) with
4th gear or higher engaged.

With an electronic gearbox


To be registered or activated, the speed of the
vehicle must be above 25 mph (40 km/h) with
1. Cruise control mode selection / off. 2nd gear or higher engaged in manual mode, or
2. Increase the registered speed setting. position A selected.
3. Decrease the registered speed setting.
4. Cruise control Off / Resume.
With an automatic gearbox
To be registered or activated, the speed of the
vehicle must be above 25 mph (40 km/h) with
2nd gear or higher engaged in manual mode, or
position D selected.

128

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Registering a cruise speed


setting
Temporarily exceeding the
speed
It is possible to accelerate and temporarily
drive at a speed higher than the registered
Resume
5
speed setting.
The cruise speed setting value flashes.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the
vehicle will return to the registered speed - After the cruise control has been paused,
setting. press this button.
- Bring the vehicle up to the desired speed The vehicle returns to the last registered speed.
by pressing the accelerator. Or, you can also start the procedure for
"registering a cruise speed setting".

Pause (OFF)
- Press the SET - or SET +
button

Changing the registered


speed setting
- Press this button or the brake or clutch
The speed setting is registered/activated and pedal.
the vehicle will maintain this speed.

To register a speed higher than the previous


setting, there are two possibilities.

129

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Switching off the function Be vigilant when modifying the cruise


- Place the thumb wheel at the "0" position: control setting by pressing and holding,
Without using the accelerator cruise control mode is deselected. The as the speed of your vehicle may
- Press the SET + button. display returns to the total mileage increase or decrease quickly.
A short press increases the speed setting by recorder. Do not use the cruise control on
1 mph (km/h). After switching off the ignition, all registered slippery roads or in heavy traffic.
Pressing and holding increases the setting in speed settings are lost. On a steep descent, the cruise control
steps of 5 mph (km/h). will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the registered speed.
Using the accelerator Operating fault The cruise control system cannot in
any circumstances replace the need
- Accelerate beyond the registered speed to
to observe speed limits or the need for
the new desired speed.
vigilance on the part of the driver.
- Press the SET + or SET - button.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
To register a speed lower than the previous and secured to the floor correctly,
setting: The registered speed setting is erased, then
- never fit one mat on top of another.
- Press the SET - button. replaced by three dashes.
A short press decreases the speed setting by Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
1 mph (km/h). qualified workshop.
Pressing and holding decreases the setting in
steps of 5 mph (km/h).

130

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Speed settings Operation


Principle
The speed values applied by the speed limiter
"LIMIT" and the cruise control "CRUISE" can
be saved (up to 5 different speed settings).
5

With the touch screen F Enter the new value.


F Press on confirm.
F Go to the main menu by pressing F Confirm to save the modifications and quit
the "MENU" button. the menu.

F Select the "Driving" menu. For safety reasons, the driver must
carry out these operations when
stationary.
F Select the secondary page.
Advice
F Select "Speed settings".
Use this button to select all speeds.

Use this button to deselect all


F Select the speed to be modified. speeds.
F Press "Modify".
This button restores the factory
settings.

131

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Steering mounted control

Selection
To select a saved speed:
F press and hold button "+" or "-"; the
system stops at the closest saved speed,
F press and hold button "+" or "-" again to
select another saved speed.
A reminder of the speed and the state of the
system (on / off) is displayed in the instrument
panel.

132

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Active City Brake


Principle Operation
5

A preventive driving assistance system that, using During detection: Required conditions:
a sensor located at the top of the windscreen, - Display of a message. - Vehicles driving in the same lane.
automatically applies the vehicle's brakes if behind - Illumination of the brake lamps. - Not in too pronounced a bend.
a vehicle in the same lane that is slowing down The automatic braking occurs later than when - Speed of the vehicle between 3 and
rapidly, stopping or is stationary. normal by the driver and only takes place if 18 mph (5 and 30 km).
The objective is to avoid a collision or reduce the the driver fails to apply the brakes at all or - Braking assistance systems (ABS, EBFD,
speed of impact. sufficiently firmly, or to take avoiding action. EBA) in working order.
- Trajectory control systems (ASR, DSC) in
The Active City Brake system can in no circumstances working order and not deactivated.
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. - Operation of Active City Brake not
triggered in the previous 10 seconds.

Never look at the laser sensor through


an optical instrument (magnifying glass,
microscope...) at a distance of less than
10 centimetres: risk of eye injury.

133

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Touch screen

A collision is probably avoided if the speed


difference between the vehicles is not more
than 9 mph (15 km/h). If the automatic braking
function is not able to avoid a collision, the
speed of impact will have been reduced by
lowering the speed of the vehicle.

Switching on:

Press "MENU" to display the "MAIN


The automatic braking triggered: Limits of operation MENU".
- can be even more effective if the driver Not detected are:
presses the brake pedal more firmly, - Some other road users: pedestrians, Select "Driving".
- may stop the vehicle, holding the brakes on animals, motorcyclists, cyclists.
for 1.5 seconds when stationary to allow - Fixed and non-reflective materials.
the driver time to take back control of the Select "Secondary page".
vehicle,
- may cause the engine to stall,
- can be interrupted if the driver takes Select "Vehicle settings".
avoiding action,
- may give rise to a pumping noise resulting
from the pressurisation of the braking Select the "Driving assistance" tab.
system. Check the "Automatic emergency
braking activated" box.

Confirm.

134

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Advice
Switching off:
Check the "Automatic emergency braking
deactivated" box.
The last selection remains in memory when the
ignition is switched off.
To clean or clear: from the top of the
windscreen, any dirt, masking deposits or
accumulation of mist on the windscreen, any
stickers or leaves obstructing the field of vision
of the laser, as well as accumulations of snow
Maintenance
Check that the sensor is not obscured.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
5
- The message "Automatic braking system
If the automatic emergency braking function is on the bonnet that could interfere with the
fault" accompanied by an audible signal
deactivated, following each start a temporary perception of risks and so the measurement.
indicating that a fault has been detected.
message will be displayed to signal this If the laser is obscured, a message appears
- Following an impact, the system is
once a speed threshold  (6 mph - 10 km/h) is to suggest cleaning and/or demisting the
automatically put out of service, it no longer
exceeded. windscreen.
works. The system detects the deployment
Remain particularly vigilant when driving
of airbags.
in poor weather (very heavy rain, hail, fog,
To deactivate:
snow…) as braking distances increase while
- Following an impact to the windscreen
the laser's calculation parameters stay the
close to the sensor.
same.
- When towing a trailer.
- When the vehicle is being towed.
Class 1M Laser Product: The laser
rays are invisible, do not look at it
directly with an optical instrument
To check (whether it is necessary to deactivate (magnifying glass, microscope…) as
the function before): there is a risk of eye injury.
- crossing a toll payment barrier.
- going through an automatic car wash.

135

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Road holding
Definition Emergency braking assistance Dynamic stability control (DSC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) comprising Definition Definition
the following systems: In an emergency, this system enables you to If there is a difference between the path
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and reach the optimum braking pressure more followed by the vehicle and that required by the
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), quickly and therefore reduce the stopping driver, this system monitors each wheel and
- emergency braking assistance, distance. automatically acts on the brake of one or more
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction It is triggered in relation to the speed at which wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
control, the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a to the required path, within the limits of the laws
- dynamic stability control (DSC). reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an of physics.
increase in the effectiveness of the braking.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Anti-slip regulation (ASR)


and electronic brake force Definition
distribution (EBFD) This system (also known as Traction Control)
Definition optimises traction in order to avoid wheel
These systems improve the stability and slip by acting on the brakes of the driving
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking wheels and on the engine. It also improves
and contribute towards improved control in the directional stability of the vehicle on
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road acceleration.
surfaces.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The electronic brake force distribution system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.

136

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Anti-lock braking system


(ABS) and electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD) 5
Operation When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
make sure that these are approved for
The fixed illumination of this warning your vehicle.
lamp indicates that there is a fault Normal operation of the ABS may make
with the ABS. itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive pedal.
carefully at moderate speed.

In emergency braking, press


When this warning lamp comes on,
very firmly without releasing the
coupled with the STOP and ABS
pressure.
warning lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message, it indicates
that there is a fault with the electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD).
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as
soon as possible.

137

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Limits of operation Advice


Dynamic stability control (DSC) Principle The DSC system is switched on automatically
and anti-slip regulation (ASR) In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle every time the engine is started or after
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft reaching a speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the Except for the 1.6 litre THP 155, THP 200 and
DSC system, so that the wheels can spin freely THP 208 engines, where the button has to
and regain grip. be pressed; the indicator lamp in the button
However, it is recommended that the system be stays off.
reactivated as soon as possible.
Fixed illumination
The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

Operation
The DSC system offers exceptional
These systems are activated automatically safety in normal driving, but this should
each time the vehicle is started. not encourage the driver to take extra
F Pressing switches off the DSC system, the
risks or drive at high speed.
The operation of the dynamic grip or indicator lamp in the button comes on. You
The correct operation of the system
trajectory control system is signalled can the spin the wheels to regain grip.
depends on observation of the
by flashing of the warning lamp in the
manufacturer's recommendations
instrument panel, each time they are
regarding the wheels (tyres and rims),
brought into play.
the braking components, the electronic
components and the PEUGEOT
assembly and repair procedures.
After an impact, have the system
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Pressing again switches the system
back on.

138

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Trip computer Trip reset

Instrument panel screen


5
- The current information with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption, F When the trip required is displayed, press
F Each press on the end of the wiper ● the Stop & Start time counter. the control for more than two seconds
control stalk displays the information in or use the left hand thumb wheel of the
turn. steering mounted controls.
- Trip "1" with: Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
● the average speed. is identical.
● the average fuel consumption, For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
● the distance travelled, figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
for the first trip.

- Trip "2" with:


● the average speed,
● the average fuel consumption, Advice
● the distance travelled, Even though the definition of each type of
for the second trip. information is common, the symbols are not;
the touch screen symbols are shown.

139

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Touch screen
Successively: Current fuel consumption
(l/100 km or km/l or mpg)
Current information Calculated over the last few seconds.

Range
(miles or km) This function is only displayed above
The distance that can be 20 mph (30 km/h).
travelled using the remaining
fuel in the tank (based on the
average fuel consumption over
the last few miles).
Stop & Start time counter
F Press the MENU button to (if function present)
display the main menu. (In minutes / seconds -
This value can vary following a change
hours / minutes)
in driving conditions or the relief of the
If your vehicle has Stop & Start,
road, giving rise to a big difference in
F Select the "Driving" menu. a time counter records the periods in
current fuel consumption.
STOP mode during a journey.
It is reset to zero every time the ignition is
Once the remaining range is below 20 miles switched on using the key.
F Select the desired tab using your finger. (30 km), dashes are displayed. After topping up with
at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and
displayed if it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).

If dashes instead of figures continue


to be displayed when driving, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

140

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Trip "1"
Trip reset
5
Trip "2"

For each separate trip:

Average fuel consumption


(l/100 km or km/l or mpg)
Calculated since the last time the trip
was reset.
F When the desired trip is
displayed, press the reset
Average speed
button.
(km/h or mph)
Calculated since the last time the
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
trip was reset.
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Distance travelled
(km or miles)
Calculated since the last time the
trip was reset.

141

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.

Optimise the use of your gearbox Control the use of your electrical
equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
During acceleration change up early. by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
The gear shift indicator invites you engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the desired temperature is attained.
soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
straight away. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
does not require their use.
Drive smoothly
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO2
emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise. As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.

142

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on


maintenance
5
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. the door aperture, driver's side.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof Carry out this check in particular:
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. - before a long journey,
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. - at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter,
passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of
operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.

With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to
the legal level.

When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.

143

208_en_Chap05_conduite_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Direction indicators Hazard warning lamps


Three flashes Visual warning with of all the direction
indicators flashing to alert other road users to a
Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards,
vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
without going beyond the point of resistance;
the corresponding direction indicators will flash
3 times.

This function can be used at any speed,


but it is particularly useful for changing F Press this button, all of the
lane on fast roads. direction indicators flash.

They can operate with the ignition off.

F Lower the lighting control stalk fully when


moving to the left. Automatic operation
F Raise the lighting control stalk fully when
When braking in an emergency, depending
moving to the right.
on the deceleration, the lamps come on
automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
If you forget to cancel the accelerate.
direction indicators for more than F You can also switch them off by pressing
twenty seconds, the volume of the the button.
audible signal will increase if the speed
is above 40 mph (60 km/h).

144

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Lighting
Main lighting
The vehicle has various different lamps:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
Additional lighting
Other lamps are fitted to fulfil the requirements
of particular driving conditions:
- a rear foglamp to better signal the
Automatic lighting
functions
Various automatic lighting functions are also
available depending on options:
6
dazzling other drivers, presence of the vehicle in foggy conditions, - guide-me-home lighting,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when - front foglamps with cornering lighting, - cornering lighting,
the road is clear, - daytime running lamps to be seen during - welcome lighting,
- directional headlamps for improved the day, - daytime running lamps,
visibility when cornering. - guide-me-home and welcome lighting for - automatic illumination of headlamps.
leaving and entering to the vehicle.

In some weather conditions (e.g. low


temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.

145

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Manual mode

Place the desired symbol against the marking. Dipping the headlamps
Pull the stalk to switch the lighting between
Lighting off (ignition off) / Daytime dipped / main beam headlamps.
running lamps (engine running).
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
Sidelamps only.
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Dipped or main beam headlamps.

Display
Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp
in the instrument panel confirms the lighting
switched on.

146

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Foglamps
6

Operation
The foglamps operate with dipped or main
beam headlamps on.
Rear foglamp only Front foglamps and rear
foglamp

F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards. Rotate and release the ring: When the headlamps switch off with automatic
When the lighting is switched off automatically F forwards a first time to switch on the front illumination of headlamps (AUTO model)
(with AUTO model), the foglamp and the dipped foglamps, or when the dipped beam headlamps are
beam headlamps will remain on. F forwards a second time to switch on the switched off manually, the foglamps and
F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards. rear foglamp, sidelamps remain on.
F rearwards a first time to switch off the rear F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off
foglamp, the foglamps, the sidelamps will then
F rearwards a second time to switch of the switch off.
front fog lamps.

147

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

In good or rainy weather, both day Switching off the lamps Switching on the lamps
and night, the front foglamps and the when the ignition is after the ignition is
rear foglamp are prohibited. In these switched off switched off
situations, the power of their beams
On switching off the ignition, all of the To reactivate the lighting control, rotate
may dazzle other drivers. They should
lamps turn off immediately, except for the ring to the "0" position - lamps off,
only be used in fog or snow.
dipped beam if guide-me-home lighting then to the desired position.
In these weather conditions, it is your
is activated. On opening the driver's door a
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
temporary audible signal warns the
and dipped beam headlamps manually
driver that the lighting is on.
as the sunshine sensor may detect
The lamps, with the exception of the
sufficient light.
sidelamps, switch off automatically after
Do not forget to switch off the front
a maximum duration of thirty minutes to
foglamps and the rear foglamp when
prevent discharging of the battery.
they are no longer necessary.

148

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

AUTO mode Automatic guide-me-home

6
lighting
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are Association with the automatic lighting provides Switching off
switched on automatically, without any action the guide-me-home lighting with the following
on the part of the driver, when a low level of additional options: Deactivate the "Guide me home"
ambient light is detected or in certain cases of - selection of the lighting duration of 15, 30 function.
activation of the windscreen wipers. or 60 seconds,
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient - automatic activation of guide-me-home
level or after the windscreen wipers are switched lighting when the automatic illumination of
In the event of a fault with the
off, the lamps are switched off automatically. headlamps is in operation.
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed
Configuration
in the instrument panel and/or a message
appears in the screen, accompanied by an
Switching on
audible signal.
Press "MENU" to display the "MAIN Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
MENU". workshop.

Select "Driving".

Select "Secondary page". In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor


Switching on may detect sufficient light. In this
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. case, the lighting will not come on
Activation of the function is accompanied Select "Vehicle settings".
automatically.
by a message in the screen. Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
Select the "Driving assistance" tab.
located in the centre of the windscreen
Switching off
behind the rear view mirror; the
F Turn the ring to another position. associated functions would no longer
Deactivation of the function is Activate the "Guide me home" be controlled.
accompanied by a message in the screen. function.

149

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

LED lamps Daytime running lamps


Daytime lighting, compulsory in certain The instruments and controls (instrument
countries, which comes on automatically when panel, multifunction screen, air conditioning
the engine is started making the vehicle more control panel, ...) are not illuminated, except
visible to other users. in night mode with manual or automatic
illumination of headlamps.

This function is assured:


- in countries where it is imposed by
regulations, by illumination of the dipped
beam headlamps with the sidelamps and
number plate lamps; this function cannot
be deactivated.
They come on when the engine is started. - for other countries where it is provided,
Depending on the country of sale, they are by the use of dedicated lamps (bulbs or
used for: LEDs); this function can be activated or
- daytime running lamps* in day mode and deactivated via the vehicle configuration
sidelamps in night mode (they are brighter menu.
when daytime running lamps), The lighting control stalk must be placed in
or the "0" or "AUTO" (day mode) position.
- sidelamps in day and night mode. Deactivation of the daytime running lamps is
effective after operation of the lighting control
stalk or after the next engine start; activation is
effective immediately.

* Function that can be set in the vehicle


configuration menu.
150

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Manual guide-me-home
lighting
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam
headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has
Parking lamps
6
been switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.

Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of


the sidelamps on the traffic side only.
F Within one minute of switching off the
ignition, operate the lighting control stalk
up or down depending on the traffic side
Switching on Switching off (for example: when parking on the left;
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps The manual guide-me-home lighting switches lighting control stalk upwards; the right
using the lighting stalk. off automatically after a set time. hand sidelamps are on).
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.

Manual guide-me-home lighting is This is confirmed by an audible signal and


also available from the remote control illumination of the corresponding direction
lighting button (see the "Remote indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.
control" section). To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the middle position or
switch on the ignition.

151

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Headlamp adjustment

Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that
drives on the other side of the road, the
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
dazzling on-coming drivers.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road


users, the headlamp beams should be adjusted
according to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. Intermediate setting
1. 5 people.
-. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
2. Driver + maximum authorised load.

The initial setting is position "0".

152

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Cornering lighting

Operation
The system operates:
6
- when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.

No operation
With dipped or main beams, this function With cornering lighting
The system does not operate:
makes use of the beam from a front foglamp
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the
steering wheel,
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approximately
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road,
- when reverse gear is engaged.
intersections, parking manoeuvres...).

Programming
The system is activated or
deactivated in the vehicle
configuration menu.
The system is activated by default.

Without cornering lighting

153

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Changing a bulb
The headlamps are fitted with Front lamps
polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a
pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
A. Model with light guide B. Model without light guide
1. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). 1. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
Changing a bulb should only be done 3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps 3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
after the headlamp has been switched (light emitting diodes - LEDs). (W5-5W).
off for several minutes (risk of serious 4. Direction indicators (PWY-24W). 4. Direction indicators (PWY-24W).
burns). 5. Front foglamps (directional according 5. Front foglamps (directional according
F Do not touch the bulb directly with to version) (H11-55W). to version) (H11-55W).
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti- In some weather conditions (e.g. low
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid temperature or humidity), the presence
damaging the headlamp. of misting on the internal surface of the
Always replace a failed bulb with a glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
new bulb with the same type and is normal; it disappears after the lamps
specification. have been on for a few minutes.

154

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

C. GTi model Changing direction indicator


1. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). bulbs
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
Rapid flashing of the direction indicator Amber coloured bulbs, such as the
3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
warning lamp (right or left) indicates the direction indicators, must be replaced
(light emitting diodes - LEDs).
failure of a bulb on that side. with bulbs of identical specifications
4. Direction indicators (light emitting
and colour.
diodes - LEDs).
When refitting, close the protective
5. Front foglamps (directional according
cover carefully to preserve the sealing
to version) (H11-55W).
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and of the headlamp.
extract it.
F Pull out the bulb and change it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.

155

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Changing dipped beam headlamp Changing main beam headlamp Changing daytime running lamp /
bulbs bulbs sidelamp bulbs
F Remove the protective cover by pulling on F Disconnect the main headlamp connector. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
the tab. F Remove the protective cover by pulling on it out.
F Disconnect the bulb connector. the tab. F Pull out the bulb and replace it.
F Spread the spring to release the bulb To reassemble, carry out these operations in
(model A). reverse order.

F Extract the bulb and change it. F Disconnect the bulb connector.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in F Pull out the bulb and replace it.
reverse order, positioning the alignment lug at To reassemble, carry out these operations in
the bottom (model A) or at the top (model B). reverse order, positioning the alignment lug at
the bottom.

156

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Changing the daytime running Changing front foglamp /


lamps / sidelamps (light-emitting directional lamps
diodes - LEDs) F Access to the front foglamp is through the
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, orifice below the bumper.
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Disconnect the bulb holder connector by
workshop. pressing on the top of the tongue.
F Extract the bulb holder by pressing on the
two clips clips (top and bottom).
F Replace the module.

To reassemble, carry out these


operations in reverse order.
To obtain this module, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
You can also contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop for this
replacement.

157

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Rear lamps

1. Brake lamps (light-emitting diodes -


Changing integrated direction
LEDs.
indicator side repeater bulbs
2. Reversing lamps (P21W).
F Insert a flat screwdriver between the mirror 3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
To reassemble, carry out these
glass and its base. 4. Sidelamps (light-emitting diodes -
operations in reverse order.
F Use the screwdriver as a lever to extract LEDs).
You should contact a PEUGEOT
the mirror glass.
dealer or a qualified workshop for the
F Unclip the mirror shell by pressing on the
replacement of these bulbs.
two retaining clips.
F Press the central tongue and remove the
side repeater.
F Pull the bulb holder out and replace the
failed bulb.

5. Foglamp (P21W).

158

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Light emitting diodes-LEDs Changing reversing lamp and


For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT dealer direction indicator bulbs
or qualified workshop. These two bulbs are changed from inside the
boot:
F open the boot, F press the four tabs and remove the bulb
F remove the access grille from the holder,
corresponding side trim panel, F turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
F slacken and remove the nut, change it.
F disconnect the lamp unit connector, To reassemble, carry out these operations in
F unclip the lamp unit carefully extract it reverse order.
pulling in line towards the outside, Take care to engage the lamp unit in its guides,
while keeping it in line with the vehicle.
Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but
without damaging the lamp.

159

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Lighting and signalling

Changing the third brake lamp Number plate lamps Changing a foglamp bulb
bulbs
F Unscrew the fixing pins on each side of the To facilitate the removal of the lamp, carry out Access is by passing a hand under the bumper.
lamp, without removing them completely. this operation with the tailgate half open. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
F Push on the screws to unclip the lamp. F Insert a thin screwdriver into the lens pull it out.
F Disconnect the lamp connector. cutout. F Disconnect the connector on the bulb
F Remove the lamp from the outside. F Push it outwards. holder.
F Turn the bulb holder which corresponds F Remove the lens. F Pull the bulb out and change it.
to the faulty bulb one quarter of a turn and F Change the faulty bulb. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
remove it. To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place. order.
F Pull the bulb and change it. You can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse qualified workshop for the replacement of these
order. bulbs.

160

208_en_Chap06_Feux-Signalisations_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Fittings
Interior
Glove box
Placed in the lower dashboard, facing the
Open storage
At the foot of the centre console:
7
passenger's seat. - 2 locations for standard size cups or cans.
Provided with a lid with a grip, that is raised to Door pockets.
open it.
Depending on the trim level, it is illuminated on
opening.

It may house: Below a front seat


F the handbook pack.
Location for the warning triangle in its cover or
F a water bottle.
storage box.

Large open storage


It is in the location for an audio system
(depending on version).

161

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Mats
Fitting Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
F position the mat correctly,
F refit the fixings by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the


pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the - never fit one mat on top of another.
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the The use of mats not approved by
wallet attached. PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
The other mats are simply placed on the the pedals and hinder the operation of
carpet. the cruise control / speed limiter.
The mats approved by PEUGEOT have
two fixings located below the seat.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
F move the seat as far back as possible,
F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.

162

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Boot
1. Rear parcel shelf
2. Hooks
3. Boot lamp
7
4. Stowing rings (depending on version)

163

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Fitting roof bars


Rear parcel shelf When fitting transverse roof bars, take care to
position them correctly on the retaining pins
located in the door apertures.

Use accessories recommended


by PEUGEOT observing the
manufacturer's recommendations and
fitting instructions so as to avoid the
risk of damaging the body (deformation,
scratches, ...).

Do not exceed the maximum authorised


load, shown in the instructions for the
To remove the shelf:
roof bars.
F unhook the two cords,
F raise the shelf slightly, then remove it. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
To stow it: and the fixings on the roof.
- vertically behind the rear seats, Be sure to refer to national legislation in
- vertically behind the front seats. order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects which are longer
To refit the shelf:
than the vehicle.
F engage it in the supports on each side and
slide it up to the cut-outs,
F raise it to refit the two cords.

164

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Towing a trailer
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
7
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.

Your vehicle is primarily designed for


transporting people and luggage, but it may
also be used for towing a trailer. Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.

The rear parking sensors will be


deactivated automatically if a genuine
PEUGEOT towbar is used.

165

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Driving advice
Distribution of loads Cooling Braking
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the Towing a trailer on a slope increases the Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
heaviest items are as close as possible to temperature of the coolant. To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
the axle and the nose weight approaches As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling mountain type of descent, the use of engine
the maximum permitted without capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. braking is recommended.
exceeding it. F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
Air density decreases with altitude, thus speed.
reducing engine performance. Above The maximum towed load on a long incline
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must depends on the gradient and the ambient Tyres
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of temperature. F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
altitude. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
temperature. recommended pressures.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for details
of the weights and towed loads which apply to
your vehicle.
F If the warning lamp and the Lighting
STOP warning lamp come on, F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
stop the vehicle and switch off on the trailer.
Side wind the engine as soon as possible.
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.

166

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Towing

7
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
for towing another vehicle using a removable General
towing eye. recommendations In the following cases, you must always call
Observe the legislation in force in your on a professional recovery service:
Access to the tools country. - vehicle broken down on a motorway or
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle fast road,
is higher than that of the towed vehicle. - four-wheel drive vehicle,
The driver must remain at the wheel of the - when it is not possible to put the
towed vehicle and must have a valid driving gearbox into neutral, unlock the
licence. steering, or release the parking brake,
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels - towing with only two wheels on the
on the ground, always use an approved ground,
towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited. - where there is no approved towing arm
The towing vehicle must move off gently. available...
When towing a vehicle with the engine off,
there is no longer any power assistance for
braking or steering.
The towing eye is installed in the boot under
the floor.
To gain access to it:
F open the boot,
F lift the floor and remove it,
F remove the towing eye from the holder.

167

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Being towed Towing another vehicle


F With an electronic gearbox, place
the gear lever in position N.
F With an automatic gearbox, place
the gear lever in position N.
Failure to observe this instruction could
result in damage to certain components
(braking, transmission...) and the
absence of braking assistance the next
time the engine is started.
F Unlock the steering by turning the
key in the ignition one notch and
F In the front bumper, unclip the cover by release the parking brake. F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at bottom right. pressing at the bottom.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towing arm. F Install the towing arm.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
lever in neutral. both vehicles. both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance only. distance.

168

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts
is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.
These accessories and parts are all suitable
for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's
recommendation and warranty.
"Comfort":
door deflectors, side blinds and rear blind,
cigarette lighter, boot dividers, coat hanger
fixed to head restraint, front centre armrest,
"Security":
anti-theft alarm, window engraving, wheel
security bolts, child seats and booster
cushions, breathalyzer, first aid kit, warning
7
under shelf storage, front and rear parking triangle, high visibility jacket, stolen vehicle
sensors... tracking system, temporary puncture repair kit,
The fitting of electrical equipment snow chains, non-slip covers, front foglamps
or accessories which are not kit...
recommended by PEUGEOT may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical "Transport solutions":
consumption. boot liner with dividers, luggage net, roof bars,
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
"Protection":
bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof
for information on the range of mats, seat covers compatible with lateral
box....
recommended equipment and airbags, mud flaps, side protection rubbing
accessories. strips, bumper protection rubbing strips,
aluminium or PVC door aperture finishers...
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and
Conversion kits "Styling": secured correctly,
You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a aluminium gear lever knob, spoiler, styling - never fit one mat on top of another.
trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa. strips, alloy wheels, trims, chromed mirror
shells, body kit, three styling kits (Ligne S,
Street and Graffic), stickers, interior and
exterior mirror shells, parking brake lever grips,
alloy wheels, alloy wheel caps... Tow bar, which must be fitted by
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

169

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

"Multimedia":
audio systems, portable satellite navigation By visiting a PEUGEOT dealer, you can also
Depending on the legislation in force in
systems, semi-integral support for portable obtain products for cleaning and maintenance
the country, certain safety equipment
satellite navigation system, hands-free kit, CD (exterior and interior) - including ecological
may be compulsory: high visibility
changer, speakers, DVD player (depending on products in the "TECHNATURE*" range,
safety vests, warning triangles,
version), connection kit for MP3 or CD player, topping up products (screenwash...), touch-up
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
USB Box, Wi-Fi on-board... pens and paint aerosols for the exact colour of
fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
your vehicle, refills (cartridge for the temporary
at the rear of the vehicle.
puncture repair kit...), ...
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).

* The "TECHNATURE" range comprises


products for the care and maintenance of
your vehicle, recommended and approved by
PEUGEOT.
170

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve
traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle
when braking.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Advice on installation
F If you have to fit the chains during a
7
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
Original Maximum link F Apply the parking brake and position any
tyre size size. wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
185/65 R15 F Fit the chains following the instructions
9 mm provided by the manufacturer.
195/55 R16 F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
205/45 R17 7 mm
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
For more information on snow chains, contact a chains are correctly tightened.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow, to
avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
The snow chains must be fitted only
the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
to the front wheels. They must never
with alloy wheels, check that no part of
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
the chain or its fixings is in contact with
wheels.
the wheel rim.

Take account of the legislation in force


in your country on the use of snow It is strongly recommended that before
chains and the maximum running speed you leave, you practise fitting the snow
authorised. chains on a level and dry surface.

171

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Fittings

Straight cut matt paint - Do not use paint restorers, abrasive or Maintenance:
polishing products or paint preservers Observe the following recommendations to
(wax polish, for example) on the paintwork. avoid damaging the paint finish:
These products are only suitable for bright - Choose a high pressure wash, or at least a
finishes. Using them on vehicles finished high water delivery; roller brush washing is
with matt paint seriously damages the compatible.
surface finish of the vehicle, resulting in - Gently wipe the body with a clean
particular in the appearance of irreversible microfibre cloth.
bright or stained areas. - Carefully wipe off any fuel spilt on the body
- Never use a high pressure jet washer fitted using a soft cloth, then allow to dry.
with a brush as this may scratch the paint - Clean off any minor marks (for example,
surface. finger marks...), using the product in the
- Never select a wash programme with a "TECHNATURE " range intended for
final hot wax cycle. removing insects.

The recommendations on the care and


maintenance of the matt paint given in the
servicing and warranty booklet are repeated
below: On the other hand:
- Never clean the vehicle without water. - Do not use a wash programme that
- Never clean your vehicle in an automatic Textured paint includes a final hot wax cycle.
roller-brush car wash. - Do not use waterless cleaning.
The textured paint reacts to light with variations
- Never polish the body or the alloy wheels. - Never polish the vehicle.
of appearance and finish that emphasise
This makes the paint bright. - Do not use paint restorers, abrasive
the car's lines and form. This paint contains
or polishing products, or bright paint
particles that remain visible and create
preservers (wax polish, for example).
a unique satin effect with relief. Its lightly
It is always preferable to have paint repairs
granulated texture gives it a surprising feel.
carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

172

208_en_Chap07_Amenagements_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

PEUGEOT & TOTAL,


A partnership to deliver
better performance!
Innovation, the key to success
The TOTAL Research and Development and
8
PEUGEOT teams work together to develop high
quality lubricants that meet the requirements
of PEUGEOT vehicles. For you, this is the
assurance that the performance of your engine
is optimised while also ensuring its durability.
The 208 HYbrid FE demonstrates the ability of
PEUGEOT and TOTAL to develop innovative
technologies and provide other ways of moving
towards the future.

Reduced exhaust emissions,


a true reality
TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the
efficiency of engines and the protection of the
emissions post-treatment systems. It is important
to observe the servicing recommendations
made by PEUGEOT to assure correct operation.
208 HYbrid FE, a technology demonstrator with exceptional characteristics:
1.9 l/100 km (148.7 mpg) and 0 to 100 km/h (0 to 62 mph) in 8 seconds.

RECOMMENDS

173

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

General information
Engine characteristics Weights and towed loads

The engine characteristics (capacity, The maximum weights and towed loads for your
High ambient temperatures may result
maximum power, maximum power speed, fuel, vehicle are given are given in the registration
in a reduction in the performance of
CO2 emissions...) for your vehicle are given in document, as well as in sales brochures.
the vehicle to protect the engine; when
the registration document, as well as in sales These values are also present on the
the ambient temperature is higher than
brochures. manufacturer's plate or label.
37 °C, limit the towed weight.
These characteristics correspond to the See the "Identification markings" section.
values type-approved on a test bed, under For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
conditions defined in European legislation dealer or a qualified workshop.
(Directive 1999/99/EC).
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
The kerb weight is equal to the unladen Towing with a lightly loaded vehicle can
dealer or a qualified workshop.
weight + driver (75 kg). adversely affect roadholding.
The gross train weight and towed load values Braking distances are increased when
indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of towing a trailer.
1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when
be reduced by 10 % for every additional towing (comply with the legislation in
1 000 metres. force in your country).
The weight of the braked trailer can be
increased, within the GTW limit, on condition
that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount.
The recommended nose weight is the vertical
load on the towbar ball (removable with or
without tools).

GVW: gross vehicle weight, the maximum authorised vehicle weight.


GTW: gross train weight, the maximum authorised weight of vehicle
plus trailer.
174

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Bonnet
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
8
START mode.

Opening
A. Interior release lever.
B. Exterior safety catch.
C. Bonnet stay. F Lift the safety catch B and raise the F Unclip the stay C from its housing and
bonnet. place it in the support slot to hold the
bonnet open.

Do not open the bonnet under very


windy conditions.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the stay with
F Open the left hand front door. care (risk of burns). Closing
F Pull the release lever A, located at the F Take the stay C out of its support slot.
bottom of the door aperture, towards you. F Clip the stay back into its housing.
Because of the presence of electrical F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
The location of the interior release lever of its travel.
equipment under the bonnet, it is
prevents opening of the bonnet when F Pull the bonnet to check that it has latched
recommended that exposure to water
the left hand front door is closed. correctly.
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.

175

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Petrol
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking the levels of the various fluids and for
replacing certain components.

1. Screenwash reservoir.
2. Coolant header tank.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.

Checking levels
Check the levels regularly, in line with the
Take care when working under the
manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and
If a level drops significantly, have the
the cooling fan could start at any time
corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT
(even with the ignition off).
dealer or a qualified workshop.

176

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Diesel
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking the levels of the various fluids, for
replacing certain components and for priming
the fuel system.
8
1. Screenwash reservoir.
2. Coolant header tank.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
9. Priming pump (depending on engine).
The AdBlue ® additive tank filler is located in the
boot below the spare wheel.

Checking levels
Check the levels regularly, in line with the
Take care when working under the
manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and
If a level drops significantly, have the
the cooling fan could start at any time
corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT
(even with the ignition off).
dealer or a qualified workshop.

177

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Petrol engines

Engine oil capacity* Recommended nose


Engine Gearbox Speeds Unbraked trailer (kg)
(litres) weight (kg)

1.0 PureTech 68 Manual 5 3.13 450 / 600** 30

Manual 5 3.13 520 46


1.2 PureTech 82
Electronic 5 3.13 520 46

1.2 PureTech 82 S&S Electronic 5 3.13 500 46

1.4 VTi 95 LPG Manual 5 4.25 570 46

1.2 PureTech 110 S&S Manual 5 - - -

Manual 5 4.25 580 46


1.6 VTi 120
Automatic 4 4.25 580 46

1.6 THP 155 Manual 6 4.25 580 46

1.6 THP 200 hp Manual 6 4.25 580 46

1.6 THP 208 S&S Manual 6 4.25 580 46

* Capacity with oil filter replacement.


** Affaire version.
178

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Diesel engines

Engine Gearbox Speeds


Engine oil capacity*
Unbraked trailer (kg)
Recommended nose
8
(litres) weight (kg)

1.4 HDi 68 Manual 5 3.75 400 / 600** 29

1.4 e-HDi 68 Electronic 5 3.75 500 / 600** 29

1.6 HDi 75 Manual 5 3.75 - -

1.6 HDi 92 Manual 5 3.75 - -

Manual 5 3.75 570 / 600** 46


1.6 e-HDi 92
Electronic 6 3.75 580 46

1.6 e-HDi 115 Manual 6 3.75 580 46

1.6 BlueHDi 120 Manual 6 - - -

* Capacity with oil filter replacement.


** Affaire version.
179

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Fuel tank
Fuel
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres. Refuelling
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level is reached
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel. There remains
approximately 5 litres of fuel in
the tank. When the warning lamp
flashes, there is very little fuel left.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
running out of fuel.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer to the
"Running out of fuel - Diesel" section.
1. Openi the filler flap. To fill the tank safely:
2. Remove the filler cap. F the engine must be switched off,
The key cannot be removed from the
3. Hook the filler cap. F open the fuel filler flap 1,
lock until the cap is refitted.
F insert the key in the cap 2, then turn it to
Removing the filler cap may cause an
the left,
inrush of air. This vacuum is perfectly
F remove the cap and hook it onto the clip
normal and results from the sealing of
A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the located on the inside of the flap 3,
the system.
filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use F fill the tank, but do not continue after the
depending on your engine. 3rd cut-off of the pump; this could cause
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to malfunctions.
be registered by the fuel gauge.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.

180

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

When you have filled the tank:


F put the cap back in place,
F turn the key to the right, then remove it
Diesel
Particle filter
The start of saturation of the particle
filter is indicated by the fixed
Diesel additive
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of the service warning
8
from the cap,
illumination of this warning lamp lamp, accompanied by an audible
F close the flap.
accompanied by a warning message warning and a message in the
in the screen (if a display screen is screen (if a display screen is fitted).
fitted).
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, Topping-up
If you have put in the wrong fuel for regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at This additive must be topped up by a
the engine of your vehicle, you must least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
have the fuel tank drained and filled goes off. without delay.
with the correct fuel before starting If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a
the engine. low additive level.

On a new vehicle, the first particle


Fuel supply cut-off filter regeneration operations may be
Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that accompanied by a "burnt" smell, which
cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an is normal.
impact. Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.

181

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Misfuel prevention
On vehicles with Diesel engines
Mechanical device which prevents filling the
Operation Travelling abroad
tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids
the risk of engine damage that can result from When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
filling with the wrong fuel. fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
be different in other countries, the
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel into contact with the flap. The system remains
presence of the misfuel prevention
prevention device appears when the filler cap closed and prevents filling.
device may make refuelling impossible.
is removed. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
filler nozzle.
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the PEUGEOT dealer network,
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
fill the tank.
fuel pumps in the country in which you
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
intend to travel.
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.

182

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Fuel used for petrol engines

The petrol engines are compatible with


E10 bio-petrol (containing 10 % ethanol),
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with
biofuels which conform to current and future
8
conforming to European standards EN 228 and European standards (Diesel fuel which
EN 15376. complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) biofuel which complies with standard
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
comply with European standard EN 15293. engines. However, this use, even occasional,
requires strict application of the special
servicing conditions. Contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).

183

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Running out of fuel (Diesel) 1.4 HDi engine 1.6 HDi engine
On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the (except BlueHDi version)
system must be primed if you run out of fuel. tank. F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the
For versions with a manual priming pump, F Open the bonnet. tank.
refer to the drawing of the corresponding F Press and release the priming pump until F Open the bonnet.
underbonnet view. resistance is felt (there may be resistance F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with on the first press). access to the priming pump.
a misfuel prevention device, refer to the F Operate the starter motor to start the F Squeeze and release the priming pump
corresponding section. engine. repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
F Close the bonnet. may be resistance at the first press).
F Operate the starter to start the engine
(if the engine does not start at the first
If the engine does not start first time, 1.6 HDi engine attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
don't keep trying. Start the procedure trying again).
(BlueHDi version)
again from the beginning. F If the engine does not start after a few
F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the
attempts, operate the priming pump again
tank.
then start the engine.
F Switch the ignition on (without starting the
F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place.
engine).
F Close the bonnet.
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter motor to start the
engine.

184

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

BlueHDi

8
and AdBlue® additive
The technology

AdBlue ® is the brand name of the solution Check that the product is within its use-by date.
needed for operation of the SCR system. Read the instructions on the label.
If you want to fill the AdBlue ® tank yourself,
The objective of BlueHDi is to reduce by up
ensure that you have a suitable filler pipe,
to 90% the emissions of NOx (nitrous oxides)
BlueHDi vehicles have a specific AdBlue ® which may or may not be supplied with the
in the air, using a system that converts NOx
additive tank with a capacity of 17 litres. additive container.
into water vapour and nitrogen in a dedicated
Filling of the AdBlue ® tank can be done using This operation can also be carried out by a
catalytic converter: SCR (Selective Catalytic
5 or 10 litre containers or 1.89 litre bottles. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Reduction).
This objective meets the "Euro 6" emissions
standard adopted by the European Union
aimed at limiting the emissions of pollutants
from internal combustion engines.
The SCR technology used on BlueHDi engines
involves the injection of AdBlue ® fluid into the
exhaust system.

185

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Advice Driving range Range indicators

While the quantity of AdBlue ® in the additive


tank is sufficient, no information is displayed.
On the other hand, once the additive level
drops to the quantity needed for a range of
1 500 miles (2 400 km) driving, you are warned
Press this button to display the information. Different levels of alert are triggered according
by different temporary signals (warning lamp,
to the remaining driving range threshold.
message, audible signal).
You will be informed as each mileage threshold
When the AdBlue ® tank is empty, restarting
With the touch screen: is reached and the alerts will change from
becomes impossible.
temporary to permanent.
- select the "Driving assistance" - The 1st alert is triggered at a remaining
menu, driving range of 1 500 miles (2 400 km).
- The 2nd alert is triggered at a remaining
- select "Diagnostic", driving range of 375 miles (600 km).
Up to 0 miles, at which point it will be
It is strongly recommended that you do
impossible to restart the engine after a stop.
not wait for the successive alerts before
topping-up the AdBlue ® tank, but do this
- select CHECK.
as soon as possible.

If the range is greater than 3 100 miles


(5 000 km), a range value is not given.

186

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Topping-up

In the event of an overflow, wipe around the


filler mouth using a damp cloth.
Parking
Ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and
level surface.
8
In wintry conditions, ensure that
If any AdBlue ® fluid is split or splashed the temperature of the vehicle is
on to you, wash immediately with cold above -11°C. Otherwise, by freezing,
Precautions to take water or wipe yourself with a clean the AdBlue ® cannot be poured into its
Use only AdBlue ® additive that meets damp cloth. tank. Park your vehicle in a warmer
the ISO 22241 standard. If the additive has crystallised, clean it area for a few hours to allow the top-up
The AdBlue ® additive is an urea-based off using a sponge and hot water. to be carried out.
solution.
This liquid is non-flammable, colourless and
odourless.
After filling the additive tank, observe the F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
To be kept in a cool area.
following procedure:
- Switch on the ignition without starting.
- Wait 10 seconds before starting the engine.

Never dispose of empty AdBlue ®


containers and bottles in the household
waste.
Place them in a special container
provided this purpose or take them to
your dealer.

187

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Filling Closing
F Pour the contents of the bottle into your F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it
vehicle's AdBlue ® tank. a 6th of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of
a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure
Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue ® that the indicator on the cap lines up with
tank is completely empty - which is the indicator on the support.
confirmed by the alert messages and F Depending on equipment, return the spare
the impossibility of starting the engine, wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom
you must add at least 3.8 litres (so two of the boot.
1.89 litre bottles). F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate.

Access
F For access to the AdBlue ® tank, raise the
boot carpet then, depending on equipment,
lift out the spare wheel and/or the storage F Wipe away any spillage around the tank
box. filler using a damp cloth.

Opening
F Without pressing, turn the black cap a
quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off. If any additive is split or splashed, wash
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the additive has crystallised, clean it
F Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anti-
off using a sponge and hot water.
clockwise.
F Lift off the cap.

188

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Advice
Important: in the event of a top-up
after a breakdown because of a lack
of additive, signalled by the message
"Top up emissions additive: Starting
Recommendations on
storage

Freezing of the AdBlue® The SCR system includes an AdBlue ®


8
prevented", you must wait around
5 minutes before switching on the ignition,
additive tank heater that ensures operation of
the vehicle in normal conditions.
without opening the driver's door, AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C (12.2°F)
In exceptional situations, such as when
locking the vehicle or introducing the and deteriorates above 25°C (77°F).
the vehicle is kept at temperatures
key into the ignition switch. It is recommended that containers and
below -15°C (5°F) for a long period,
Switch on the ignition, then, after bottles be stored in a cool area and
there may be an emission fault alert
10 seconds, start the engine. protected from direct sunlight.
related to freezing of the AdBlue ®
Under these conditions, the additive
additive.
can be kept for at least a year.
Park the vehicle in an area at a more
Additive that has been frozen can be
Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of moderate temperature for a few hours
used once it has thawed out in ambient
children, in its original container. until the additive becomes a liquid
air.
Never transfer AdBlue ® to another again.
container: it would loose its purity. The emissions warning lamp does not
Never dilute the additive with water. go off immediately, but does so after a
Never pour the additive into the Diesel few miles of driving.
fuel tank.

Never store containers or bottles of


AdBlue ® in your vehicle.

189

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Battery
Procedure for charging your battery when it Access to the battery Disconnecting the (+) cable
is flat or for starting the engine using another
battery.

The presence of this label indicates


the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with
special technology and specification, for
which the involvement of a PEUGEOT The battery is located under the bonnet. F Raise the locking tab D fully to release the
dealer or qualified workshop is required To gain access to it: cable terminal clamp E.
when replacing or disconnecting the F open the bonnet using the interior release
battery. lever, then the exterior safety catch, Reconnecting the (+) cable
Failure to observe this recommendation F secure the bonnet stay, F Position the open clamp E of the cable on
may cause premature wear of the F remove the plastic cover on the positive post (+) of the battery.
battery. the (+) terminal. F Press vertically on the clamp E to position
it correctly on the battery.
F Lock the clamp by spreading the
positioning lug and then lowering the tab D.

After refitting the battery, the Stop &


Start system will only be active after The battery does not require any Do not apply excessive force on the
several hours depending on the climatic maintenance. tab as locking will not be possible if the
conditions and the state of charge of However, check that the terminals clamp is not positioned correctly; start
the battery (up to about 8 hours). are clean and correctly tightened, the procedure again.
particularly in summer and winter.

190

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Starting using another


battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
8
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.

First check that the slave battery has a


nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.

F Connect the red cable to the positive F Operate the starter on the broken down
terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the vehicle and let the engine run
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B. If the engine does not start straight away,
Do not try to start the engine by F Connect one end of the green or black switch off the ignition and wait a few
connecting a battery charger. cable to the negative terminal (-) of the moments before trying again.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when slave battery B (or earth point on the other F Wait until the engine returns to idle then
the engine is running. vehicle). disconnect the jump lead cables in the
F Connect the other end of the green or black reverse order.
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes.

191

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Charging the battery using Protect your eyes and face before Before disconnecting the battery
a battery charger handling the battery. Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
All operations on the battery must be before disconnecting the battery.
F Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
carried out in a well ventilated area and Close the windows and the doors before
F Follow the instructions for use provided by
away from naked flames and sources disconnecting the battery.
the manufacturer of the charger.
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
F Connect the battery starting with the
explosion or fire.
negative terminal (-).
Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
F Check that the terminals and connectors
the battery must first be thawed out to
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate
avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them
has been frozen, before charging have Following reconnection
and clean them.
it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a of the battery
qualified workshop who will check that
The Stop & Start battery does not have Following reconnection of the battery, switch on
the internal components have not been
to be disconnected for charging. the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
damaged and the casing is not cracked,
permit initialisation of the electronic systems.
which could cause a leak of toxic and
However, if problems remain following this
corrosive acid.
operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
The batteries contain harmful substances Do not reverse the polarity and use only
qualified workshop.
such as sulphuric acid and lead. They a 12 V charger.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must be disposed of in accordance Do not disconnect the terminals while
must yourself reinitialise:
with regulations and must not, in any the engine is running.
- the remote control key,
circumstances, be discarded with household Do not charge the batteries without
- the on-board satellite navigation system.
waste. disconnecting the terminals first.
Take used remote control batteries and Wash your hands afterwards.
vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
It is advisable to disconnect the battery engine if you have an electronic or
if the vehicle is to be left unused for automatic gearbox.
more than one month.

192

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Fuses
Changing
8

Access to tooling
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of For the glove box:
the dashboard or glove box fusebox cover. F Open the glove box lid.
F Unclip the fusebox cover by pulling at top
right.
For the dashboard:
F Disengage the cover fully and turn it over.
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left,
F Remove the back of the carrier on which
then right.
the tweezer is fitted.
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it
over.
F Remove the carrier on which the tweezer is
fitted.

193

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Procedure
Before changing a fuse:
F the vehicle must be immobilised with the Installing electrical
ignition off, accessories
F all electrical consumers must be switched
Your vehicle's electrical system is
off,
designed to operate with standard or
F identify the failed fuse using the tables and
optional equipment.
layout drawings in the following pages.
Before installing other electrical
Good Failed equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
To replace a fuse, you must: a qualified workshop.
F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of
its filament.
Tweezer PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
for the cost incurred in repairing your
of the same rating (same colour); using a
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
different rating could cause faults (risk of
resulting from the installation of
fire). The replacement of a fuse not shown in
accessories not supplied and not
If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, the tables below may cause a serious
recommended by PEUGEOT and
have the vehicle's electrical system checked by malfunction of your vehicle. Contact
not installed in accordance with its
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
instructions, in particular when the
workshop.
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
Professional repairers: for full information
on the fuses and relays, consult the
wiring information and diagrams available
at a PEUGEOT dealer.

194

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

On the left
Fuse N°

F2
Rating

5A
Functions

Door mirrors, headlamps, diagnostic socket.


8
F9 5A Alarm.

F10 5A Independent telematic unit, trailer interface.

F11 5A Electrochrome rear view mirror, additional heating.

F13 5A Hi-Fi amplifier, parking sensors.

F16 15 A Front 12 V socket.

F17 15 A Audio system, audio system (accessory).

F18 20 A Touch screen.

195

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Fuse N° Rating Functions

F23 5A Glove box lamp, vanity mirror, map reading lamps.

F26 15 A Horn.

F27 15 A Screenwash pump.

F28 5A Anti-theft.

F29 15 A Air conditioning compressor.

F30 15 A Rear wiper.

196

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

On the right
Fuse N°

F01
Rating

40 A Heated rear window.


Functions
8
F02 10 A Heated door mirrors.

F03 30 A Front one-touch windows.

F04 - Not used.

F05 30 A Rear one-touch windows.

F06 10 A Folding door mirrors.

F07 10 A Folding door mirrors.

F08 - Not used.

F09 15 A Front heated seats.

F10 20 A Hi-Fi amplifier.

F11 - Not used.

F12 - Not used.

197

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Engine compartment

The fusebox is placed in the engine


Fuse N° Rating Functions
compartment near the battery (left-hand side).
F16 15 A Front foglamps.

F18 10 A Right hand main beam headlamp.

Access to the fuses F19 10 A Left hand main beam headlamp.

F Unclip the cover. F25 30 A Headlamp wash relay (accessory).


F Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph). F29 40 A Front wiper motor.
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the
fusebox.

198

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Triangle
Before getting out of your vehicle to
assemble the triangle and place it on
the road, put on your high visibility vest.
Placing the triangle in the
road
F Place the triangle at a distance behind
8
the vehicle, as shown in the table below,
according to the type of road and the level
of ambient light.

Distance from your vehicle (in metres)

Road
Motorway
Day Night

50 m 80 m 150 m
The dimensions of the warning triangle, once
folded are as follows:
- A: length = 438 mm,
- B: height = 56 mm,
These are the internationally
- C: width = 38 mm.
recognised values.
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for use Use the triangle in line with local driving
of the triangle. regulations.

199

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Under-inflation
Under-inflation detection system which
The under-inflation detection system
automatically checks the pressures of the tyres
does not replace the need for vigilance
while driving.
on the part of the driver.
This system does not avoid the need to
check the tyre pressures (including the
The system monitors the pressures in the four spare wheel) every month as well as
tyres, once the vehicle is moving. before a long journey.
It compares the information given by the four Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs
wheel speed sensors with reference values, road holding, extends braking distances
which must be reinitialised every time the and causes premature tyre wear,
tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel particularly under arduous condition
changed. (high loading, high speed, long journey). The inflation pressures defined for
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
your vehicle can be found on the tyre
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one
pressure label.
or more tyres.
See the "Identification markings"
section.
Tyre pressures should be checked
when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle
Driving with under-inflated tyres
stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of
increases fuel consumption.
less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate
speeds).
Otherwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to
the pressures shown on the label.

200

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Under-inflation alert
This is given by fixed illumination of
this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal and, depending on
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (depending on equipment),
The alert is maintained until the system
is reinitialised.
8
equipment, the display of a message. or
F if you have a compressor, such as the one
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid
in the temporary puncture repair kit, check The under-inflation alert is only
excessive steering movements and sudden
the pressures of the four tyres when cold, dependable if the system has been
braking
or reinitialised with all four tyres inflated to
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
F if it is not possible to make this check the correct pressures.
to do so.
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
speed.
The loss of pressure detected does not
always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual
Snow chains
check. The system does not have to be
reinitialised after fitting or removing
snow chains.

201

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Reinitialising Touch screen Screen A


It is necessary to reinitialise the system every
time one or more tyre pressure is adjusted, and
after changing one or more wheels.
A label attached to the middle pillar, driver's
side, gives a reminder of this.

Before reinitialising the system, ensure


that the pressures of the four tyres are
correct for the use of the vehicle and in F With the ignition on and the
line with the recommendations on the vehicle stationary, press this
tyre pressure label. Reinitialisation of the system is done with the button for about 3 seconds then
The under-inflation detection system ignition on and the vehicle stationary. release it, an audible signal
does not give a warning if a pressure is confirms the reinitialisation.
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
From the "Driving assistance" menu
of the touch screen: Operating fault
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the
F Press "Under-inflation under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
initialisation". by illumination of the Service warning lamp
indicates a fault with the system.
Before doing anything to the system, F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes", In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
the pressures of the four tyres must be an audible signal and a message confirm tyres is no longer assured.
checked and the system reinitialised. the reinitialisation. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The new pressure settings registered
are considered to be reference values
by the system.

202

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Temporary puncture repair kit


The temporary puncture repair kit consists of
a compressor and a sealant cartridge allowing
the temporary repair of a tyre so that you can
drive to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
Access to the kit Composition of the kit
8
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
You can also use the compressor, without
injection of sealant, to check and if necessary
adjust the pressures of your tyres.

This kit is installed in the storage box, under the 1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure
boot floor. gauge.
2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose.
3. Speed limit sticker.

The vehicle's electric system allows the The speed limit sticker must be secured
connection of a compressor for long to the interior of the vehicle in the
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture driver's field of vision, to remind you
repair or for inflating a small inflatable that a wheel is in temporary use.
accessory.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph


(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.

203

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Procedure
Repair

F Switch off the ignition. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
F Secure the speed limit sticker inside the compressor. repaired, and place it in a clean area.
vehicle. F Connect the pipe from the compressor to F Connect the hose from the sealant
the sealant cartridge. cartridge to the valve of the tyre to be
F Turn the the sealant cartridge and secure it repaired and tighten firmly.
in the cut-out provided on the compressor.

Avoid removing any foreign bodies


which have penetrated into the tyre.

204

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

If after around 5 to 7 minutes the


pressure is not attained, this indicates
8
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.

F Check that the compressor switch is at F Start the compressor by placing the switch Take care, the sealant product
the "O" position). at the "I" position and leave it running until is harmful (e.g. ethylene-glycol,
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bar. colophony...) if swallowed and causes
the compressor. The sealant product is injected into the tyre irritation to the eyes.
F Connect compressor's plug to the vehicle's under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe Keep this product out of the reach of
12 V socket. from the valve during this operation (risk of children.
F Switch on the ignition. splashing and stains). The use-by date is marked on the
cartridge.
After use, do not discard the
cartridge by the roadside, take it to a
PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised
waste disposal site.
Don't forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

205

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Checking and inflating

F Place the switch in the "O" position. To check and if necessary adjust the tyre F Check that the compressor switch is at the
F Remove the kit. pressures. "O" position.
F Drive immediately for approximately F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under
three miles (five kilometres), at reduced F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and the compressor.
speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and place it in a clean area. F Connect the compressor's plug to the
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre compressor. F Switch on the ignition.
pressure using the kit. F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
firmly.

206

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

F Start the compressor by placing the switch After using the kit, refer to the previous
at the "I" position and adjust the pressure pages to check the tyre pressures
to the value shown on the vehicle's tyre and reinitialise the "Under-inflation
pressure label. detection" function.
To deflate: press the black button on the
compressor pipe, at the valve connector.
F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
the switch to the "O" position.
F Remove the kit then stow it.

207

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Spare wheel
Procedure for changing a wheel for the spare
wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

Access to the tools

List of tools*
The tools are installed in the boot under the All of these tools are specific to your 4. Socket for the security bolts.
floor. vehicle and can vary according to the level For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
To gain access to them: of equipment. Do not use them for other "security" bolts.
F open the boot, purposes. 5. Towing eye.
F lift the floor and remove it, 1. Wheelbrace. See "Towing the vehicle".
F remove the carrier box containing the tools. For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
3. "Bolt cover" tool.
For removing the bolt protectors (covers)
on alloy wheels.
* Depending on country of sale.
208

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Wheel with trim


Access to the spare wheel
8
When refitting the wheel, refit the trim
starting by placing its notch facing the
valve and press around its edge with
the palm of your hand.

The spare wheel is installed in the boot under Taking out the wheel
the floor.
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt.
According to country, the spare wheel may be
F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
steel, alloy or of the "space-saver" type.
the rear.
To gain access to it, refer to the paragraph
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
"Access to the tools" on the previous page.

209

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Putting the wheel back in place


F Put the wheel back in its housing. F Put the box back in the centre of the wheel
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few and clip it in place.
turns then put it in place in the centre of the
wheel.
F Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to
retain the wheel correctly.

210

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Removing a wheel

8
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and not slippery.
Apply the parking brake.
Switch off the ignition.
With a manual gearbox, engage first
gear to block the wheels.
With an electronic gearbox, place the
lever in position R to block the wheels.
With an automatic gearbox, place the
lever in position P to block the wheels.
Check that the parking brake warning
lamps in the instrument panel come on.
The occupants must get out of the List of operations
vehicle and wait where they are safe.
F Remove the bolt cover from each of F Place the foot of the jack 2 on the ground
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
the bolts using the tool 3 (according to and ensure that it is directly below the
using a jack; use an axle stand.
equipment). front A or rear B jacking point provided on
F Fit the security socket 4 on the the underbody, whichever is closest to the
wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt wheel to be changed.
(if fitted).
F Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.

Never use:
- the jack for any other purpose than
raising the vehicle,
- a jack other than the one provided
by the manufacturer.

211

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

F Extend the jack 2 until it comes into contact F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
with the jacking point A or B used; the space between the wheel and the ground place.
contact area A or B on the vehicle must be to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel F Remove the wheel.
correctly inserted into the central part of easily.
the head of the jack.
Ensure that the jack is stable on a
surface that is not slippery or loose and
positioned only at the jacking point A
or B under the vehicle, ensuring that
the contact area on the vehicle is
well centred on the head of the jack.
Otherwise there is a risk of damage to
the vehicle and/or of the jack dropping
or slipping - Risk of injury!

212

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Fitting a wheel
8

Fitting the "space-saver" After changing a wheel


spare wheel To store the punctured wheel in the
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, boot correctly, first remove the central
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it cover.
is normal to notice that the washers do When using the "space-saver" type
not come into contact with the "space- spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
saver" spare wheel. The wheel is (80 km/h).
secured by the conical shoulder of each Have the tightening of the bolts and the
bolt (see drawing). pressure of the spare wheel checked
When refitting the alloy wheel, ensure by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
that the wheel bolt washers are clean workshop without delay.
and in good condition. Have the punctured wheel repaired
and refitted to the vehicle as soon as
possible.

213

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

List of operations
F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Lower the vehicle fully. F Tighten the security bolt using the
F Screw in the bolts fully by hand. F Fold the jack 2 and detach it. wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the socket 4 (if your vehicle has them).
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security F Tighten the other bolts using the
socket 4 (if your vehicle has them). wheelbrace 1 only.
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the F Refit the bolt covers on each of the bolts
wheelbrace 1 only. (according to equipment).
F Store the tools in the box.

214

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Advice
Brake fluid
Level
The brake fluid level should be close
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT
Oil level
The check is carried out either when the
ignition is switched on using the oil level
8
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check dealer or a qualified workshop. indicator in the instrument panel (depending
the brake pad wear. on version), or using the dipstick.
It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.
Changing the fluid
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation. Only use products recommended by It is normal to top up the oil level
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent between two services (or oil changes).
quality and specification. PEUGEOT recommends that you check
Fluid specification In order to optimise the operation of the level, and top up if necessary, every
The brake fluid must conform to the units as important as those in the 3 000 miles (5 000 km).
manufacturer's recommendations. braking system, PEUGEOT selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
Brake pads or in wintry conditions, ice can form
for details of the interval for this operation.
on the brake discs and pads: braking
Brake wear depends on the style efficiency may be reduced. Make light In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
of driving, particularly in the case brake applications to dry and defrost and emission control system, never use
of vehicles used in town, over short the brakes. additives in the engine oil.
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes checked, even
between vehicle services. Oil specification
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
The oil must be the correct grade for your
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
engine and conform to the manufacturer's
pads are worn.
recommendations.

215

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Oil filter Used products


Replace the oil filter each time the Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
engine oil is changed. fluids with the skin.
Refer to the manufacturer's Most of these fluids are harmful to
service schedule for details of health or indeed very corrosive.
the replacement interval for this
component.

Do not discard used oil or fluids into


sewers or onto the ground.
Air filter Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or
Refer to the manufacturer's a qualified workshop (France) or to an
service schedule for details of authorised waste disposal site.
the replacement intervals for this
component.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle
(e.g. city driving), replace it twice as often if
necessary.
A dirty air filter may restrict engine
performance.

216

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Dimensions (in mm)

217

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Affaire version
Number of seats: 2.
Boot volume: 1.062 m3
Load floor length: 1.335 m.
Load width between wheel arches: 1.042 m.
Load width at centre: 1.061 m.
Load height at centre: 0.857 m.

218

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Identification markings
Various visible markings for the identification of
your vehicle.
It bears the following information:
8
- the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load,
- the tyre sizes,
- the inflation pressure of the spare wheel,
- the paint colour code.

The tyre pressures must be checked


when the tyres are cold, at least once
a month.

A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) C. Manufacturer's label.


Low tyre pressures increase fuel
under the bonnet. The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying
consumption.
This number is engraved on the bodywork label affixed to the middle pillar, on the
near the damper support. passenger's side.

B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at D. Tyre/paint label.


the bottom of the windscreen aperture. This label is fitted to the middle pillar, on
This number is indicated on a self-adhesive the driver's side.
label which is visible through the windscreen.

219

208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and telematics

Emergency call
Peugeot Connect SOS
Test of operation of the system: Conditions for use:
The green indicator lamp comes on for - In countries where the service is not
3 seconds when the ignition is switched available, or when the locating service has
on, signifying that a call can be made. been expressly declined, the call is sent
directly to the emergency services (112)
Contact a Peugeot dealer if the without the vehicle location. 112 is the
orange indicator lamp comes on: telephone number reserved for emergency
- flashing, indicates a fault. calls and is accepted throughout the
- on fixed, indicates that the back- European Union.
up battery must be replaced. - "Peugeot Connect SOS" is subject to
the terms and conditions for the service
available from dealers, and to technological
Operation: "Emergency call".
and technical limitations.
Pressing this button for more than 2 seconds
starts a call to the Peugeot Connect SOS
centre. Inadvertent press:
- The green indicator lamp flashes. - pressing brings on the green indicator lamp.
- A voice message confirms that the call is - pressing again immediately cancels the call.  
being dealt with. A voice message confirms the cancellation.
The green indicator lamp on fixed indicates that - if the call connects, explain to the contact
communication has been established. It goes that it was a mistake. The green indicator
off at the end of the communication. goes off at the end of the call.

The "Peugeot Connect SOS" centre * Depending on the geographical cover of


immediately locates your vehicle, "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT
communicates in your language*, and Connect Assistance" and the official national
depending on the circumstances, makes a call language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
to the appropriate public emergency services*. The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
CONNECT services is available from dealers
or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
220

208_en_Chap9a_BTA_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and telematics

Assistance call
Peugeot Connect Assistance
In the event of a breakdown, pressing
for more than 2 seconds starts the
call.
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, and independently of
If you benefit from the Peugeot
Connect Packs offer with the SOS and
assistance pack included, there are
9
the deployment of any airbags, an
A voice message confirms that the
emergency call is made automatically. additional services available to you in
call has been made.
your MyPeugeot personal space, via
the PEUGEOT Internet website in your
Inadvertent press:
country, accessible on
- pressing again immediately cancels
www.peugeot.co.uk.
the call. A voice message confirms the
cancellation. If you purchased your vehicle outside
the PEUGEOT dealer network, we
invite you to have a dealer check the
configuration of these services and, if
desired, modified to suit your wishes.
In a multi-lingual country, configuration
is possible in the official national
language of your choice.

For technical reasons and in particular


to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT
CONNECT services" to customers,
the manufacturer reserves the right to
update the vehicle's on-board telematic
system.

221

208_en_Chap9a_BTA_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Audio and Telematics

7-inch touch screen


GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone

Contents
9
First steps 224
Steering mounted controls 226
Menus 227
Navigation 228
Navigation - Guidance 236
Traffic 240
Radio Media 242
Radio 248
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 250
Media 252
Settings 256
Internet 264
Internet browser 265
MirrorLinkTM 268
Telephone 270
Frequently asked questions 278

The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations
your vehicle. which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
The display of the energy economy mode message signals
that the system is about to go into standby. Refer to the Energy
economy (mode) section.

223

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

First steps
Use the buttons to the left of the touch screen
In very hot conditions, the system may
for access to the menu carousels, then press
go into stand-by (screen and sound
the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
completely off) for a minimum period of
Each menu is displayed in one or two pages
5 minutes.
(primary page and secondary page).

Primary page Secondary page

224

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper


band of the touch screen, it is possible to go
directly to the selection of audio source, the list
of stations (or titles, depending on the source).
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it
is necessary to press firmly, particularly
for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a
list, moving the map...). A simple wipe
9
will not be enough. pressing with more
than one finger is not recognised.
The screen can be used when wearing
gloves. This technology allows use at
all temperatures.
Press on Menu to display the menu
carrousel.

Press on SRC to display the audio


Selecting the audio source (depending on sources carrousel. To clean the screen, use a soft
version): non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth)
- "FM" / "AM" / "DAB"* stations. without any additional product.
Volume adjustment (each source is
- "USB" memory stick. Do not use pointed objects on the
independent, including traffic announcements
- CD player (located in the glove box)*. screen.
(TA) and navigation instructions).
- Jukebox*, after first copying audio files to Do not touch the screen with wet
With the engine running, press to hands.
the internal memory of the system.
mute the sound.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and
With the ignition off, press to switch
with Bluetooth* audio streaming.
the system on.
- Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied).
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. The
return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment drops.
* Depending on equipment.
225

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Steering mounted controls

Press: mute on / off. Radio, rotate: automatic search for Telephone: start or answer a call.
the previous / next station. Call in progress: telephone menu
Radio, press: preset stations. (end call, secret mode, hands-free
Media, rotate: previous / next track. mode).
Increase volume.
Press: confirm a selection. Telephone, press and hold: reject an
incoming call, end a call in progress;
other than call in progress, telephone
Decrease volume. menu.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Change audio source: radio, media. Radio, press and hold: update the list
of stations received.

226

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Menus
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Radio Media Settings
9
Enter navigation settings and choose a Select the radio, the different music sources Set the sounds and brightness for the
destination. and view photos. instruments and controls.

Internet Telephone Driving


(Depending on equipment)

Connect using the "Internet browser". Connect a telephone by Bluetooth ®. Access the trip computer.
Operate certain applications on your Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain
smartphone via "MirrorLinkTM". vehicle functions.

227

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Navigation
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Navigation Route settings

228

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Enter destination Display recent destinations
Fastest
Shortest
Time/distance
Ecological Choose the navigation criteria.
The map displays the route chosen according to
Tolls these criteria.
Calculatory criteria
Ferries
Navigation
Traffic
Navigation Strict-Close
Settings
Show route on map Display the map and start navigation.
Confirm Save the options.
Save current location Save the current address.

Stop navigation Delete the navigation information.


Choose the volume for voice and announcement
Voice synthesis
of street names.
Detour from your initial route by a determined
Diversion
distance.
Display in text mode.

Zoom in.

Zoom out.
Navigation
Display in full screen mode.
Use the arrows to move the map.
Switch to 2D map.

229

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Enter destination Address

For managing contacts and


their addresses, refer to the
Navigation "Telephone" section.

Contacts

To use the telephone functions,


refer to the "Telephone" section.

230

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Curr. location

Points of Interest Address settings.

Town centre
Address
Save Save the current address.

Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.

Navigate to Press to calculate the route.

Addresses
Navigation
View
Secondary page
Contacts Navigate to Select a contact then calculate the route.
Enter destination
Search for contact

Call

From map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.

Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the


Itinerary
itinerary.

Stop Delete navigation information.

Navigate to Press to calculate the route.

231

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Navigation Search for a point of interest

Point of interest displayed on the map

232

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
All POIs
Navigation Garage List of categories available.
After choosing the category, select the points of
Secondary page Dining/hotels interest.

Search for POI Personal

Search Save the settings.

Select all
Navigation
Delete Choose the display settings for POIs.
Secondary page
Import POIs
Show POIs
Confirm Save the options.

233

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Diversion

Traffic messages

Map settings

Map settings
Navigation

Settings

Settings
Moving
between
Settings
the two
menus.

234

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
On the route

Around vehicle
Navigation
Settings for the choice of messages and the
Near destination
Secondary page filter radius.
Detour over a distance
Traffic messages Detour
Recalculate route

Finish Save your selections.

Flat view north heading

Orientation Flat view vehicle heading

Perspective view
Navigation
Choose the display and orientation of
Maps
Secondary page the map.
"Day" map colour
Map settings
Aspect "Night" map colour

Automatic day/night

Confirm Save the settings.

Route settings
Navigation Voice Enter settings and choose the volume for the
Secondary page Alert! voice and announcement of street names.

Settings Traffic options

Confirm Save your selections.


235

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Towards a new destination

Press on Navigation to display the Select "Save" to save the address To delete navigation information,
primary page. entered as a contact entry. press "Settings".
The system allows up to 200 entries.
Press on the secondary page. Press "Stop navigation".

Select "Navigate to".


Select "Enter destination".
To resume navigation press
"Settings".
Choose the navigation criteria:
Select "Address". "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ Press "Resume navigation".
distance" or "Ecological".

Select the "Country:" from the Choose the restriction criteria:


list offered, then in the same "Include tollroads", "Include
way the "City:" or its post ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", "Close".
code, the "Road:", the "N°:".
Confirm each time. Select "Confirm".

Or
Press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.

236

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Towards a recent destination

Press on Navigation to display the


Towards a contact

Select a destination from


9
To be able to use navigation "towards
primary page. the contacts in the list
a contact in the directory", it is first
offered.
necessary to enter the address for your
Press on the secondary page. contact.
Select "Navigate to".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" to
Press on the secondary page. start navigation.

Select an address from


the list offered.
Select "Enter destination".

Select "Navigate to". Select "Contacts".

Select the criteria then "Confirm" or


press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.

237

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map Towards points of interest (POI)

Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
primary page. primary page. categories.

Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.

Select "Enter destination". Select "Enter destination". Press on the secondary page.

Select "Address". Select "From map". Select "Search for POI".

Enter the "Longitude:" Zooming in on the map shows points with Select "All POIs"
then the "Latitude:". information.

A long press on a point opens its content.


Or
Select "Navigate to".
"Garage",

Select the criteria then "Confirm" or


press "Show route on map" to start Or
navigation. "Dining/hotels",

238

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Or
9
An annual mapping update allows new
"Personal", points of interest to be presented to
you.
You can also update the Risk areas /
Danger areas every month.
Select a category from the
The detailed procedure is available on:
list offered.
http://peugeot.navigation.com.

Select "Search".

Select a point of interest


from the list offered.

Select "Navigate to".

239

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Traffic
Hazard zone / Danger zone Traffic information
alert settings Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
This series of alerts and displays is
primary page.
only available if Risk Areas have first
been downloaded and installed on the Press on the secondary page.
Press on the secondary page. system.

Select "Traffic messages".


Select "Settings".

Set the:
Select "Alarm!".
"On the route",

It is then possible to activate Risk Areas alerts


then: "Around",
- "Audible warning"
- "Alert only when navigating"
- "Alert only for overspeed" "Near destination", filters to fine-
- "Display speed limits" tune the list of messages.
- Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk Area alert to be
Press again to remove the filter.
defined.

Select "Confirm".

240

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Select the message from


Setting filters
Press on Navigation to display the
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the
9
the list offered. primary page. primary page.

Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page.


Select the magnifying glasses to
have vocal information.
Select "Settings". Select "Settings".

TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Select "Info options". Select "Voice".


messages on GPS-Navigation contain
traffic information transmitted in real
time.
Select: Activate / Deactivate "Traffic
- "Warn of new messages", (TA)".
- "Speak messages".
Then enter the filter radius. The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
Select "Confirm".
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted,
the current audio source is interrupted
We recommend a filter radius of:
automatically to play the TA message.
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
Normal playback of the audio source
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
resumes at the end of the transmission
of the message.
241

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2

List of FM stations

Preset

242

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1

Radio Media

List
List of FM stations
Level 2 Comments

Press on a radio station to select it.


9
FM Radio

DAB Radio

AM Radio

Jukebox

Radio Media CD
Select change of source.
Source USB

MirrorLinkTM

iPod

Bluetooth

AUX

Radio Media
Press an empty location to Preset it.
Preset

243

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

List of FM stations

Media Photos

Copy to Jukebox Manage Jukebox

244

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Radio Media Preset Press a radio station to select it.

Update list Update the list of stations received.


Secondary page
Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency.
Radio list Confirm Save the settings.

Home screen Display the selected photo in the home page.

Rotate Rotate the photo 90°.

Radio Media Select all the photos in the list.


Select all
Press again to deselect.
Secondary page
Previous photo.
Display the photos in sequence, full screen.
Photos Slideshow Pause / Play. The system supports the following image
formats: .gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png.
Next photo.

Full screen Display the selected photo full-screen.

Sort by folder

Sort by album Choose a selection mode.

Select all
Radio Media
Copy Copy files to the Jukebox.

Secondary page Create folder

Rename
Manage Jukebox Choose the desired function.
Magnifying glass Delete

Select all

Confirm Save the settings.


245

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Media

Settings

Settings

Settings

246

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Radio Media

Secondary page Presentation of the last media used.

Media list

Random (all tracks):

Media
Random (current album):
Choose the play settings.
Settings
Loop:

Aux. amplification

RDS options
Radio Media DAB/FM options
Radio
Activate or deactivate the settings.
Secondary page Display Radio Text
Settings
Settings Digital radio slideshow
display

Traffic announcements (TA)

Announcements News - Weather


Activate or deactivate the settings.
Sport - Programm info
Settings
Flash - Unforeseen
events

Confirm Save the settings.

247

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Radio
Selecting a station Changing a radio frequency
Press on Radio Media to display the Select "Preset". Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page. primary page.

Select "List" in the primary page. Select a preset radio station


in the list.
If necessary, select change of By automatic frequency search
Or source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page. Select "FM Radio".
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an
Press on the secondary page. automatic search down or up for a radio
Or frequency.
"AM Radio".
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
THEN
page.

Radio reception may be affected by Select change source.


Select a radio station from
the use of electrical equipment not
the list offered.
approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB
charger connected to the 12 V socket. Select "FM Radio".
The exterior environment (hills,
Select "Update list" to refresh the buildings, tunnel, car park, below
list. ground...) may prevent reception,
even in RDS station tracking mode. Or
To select a preset radio station. This phenomenon is normal in the "AM Radio".
propagation of radio waves and is in no
Press on Radio Media to display the way indicative of a fault with the audio
primary page. system.

248

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

OR

Press on Radio Media to display the


Preset a station
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the
corresponding section).

Press on "Preset".
Activate/ Deactivate RDS
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page. 9
primary page. Press on the secondary page.

Press on the secondary page.


Select "Settings".

Select a number in the list to preset the


Press on Frequency. previously chosen radio station.
A long press on a number presets (memorises) Select "Radio".
the station.

THEN Or Activate/deactivate "RDS


options".
Enter the frequency in full A press on this button presets all of
(e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad the stations one after the other.
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
then "Confirm".
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
Recall pre-set stations
However, in certain conditions, coverage
Press on Radio Media to display the
of an RDS station may not be assured
primary page.
Changing radio station throughout the entire country as radio
Pressing the name of the current radio station stations do not cover 100 % of the territory.
Select "Save". This explains the loss of reception of the
brings up a list.
To change radio station press the name of the station during a journey.
desired station.

249

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio


Short-cut: access to the choice of audio
Display of the name of the source and the list of stations (or titles,
current station. depending on the source). Select the radio station.

Any thumbnail broadcast by


the station. Select the audio source.
Display the "DAB" band.
Manage the Jukebox.
Display current action.
Display of "Radiotext" for
the current station.
Secondary page.
Next "Multiplex".
Next radio station.
Previous "Multiplex".
Previous radio station.
Preset stations, buttons 1
to 15.
Display the name and Short press: select the
number of the multiplex preset radio station.
service being used. Long press: preset a radio
station.

Display of options:
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not
if active but not available, the display will be greyed out,
available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
if active and available, the display will be blank.

Journaline ® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems.
It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics.
This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.

250

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception and also the graphical display
of current information on the radio
DAB / FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is activated,
there is a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to "FM"
9
When the digital radio signal is poor,
station being listened to. Select "List" in "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to analogue radio with sometimes a
the primary page. continue listening to the same station, variation in volume.
The range of multiplexes available is by automatically switching to the When the digital signal is restored, the
displayed in alphabetical order. corresponding "FM" analogue station system automatically changes back to
(if there is one). "DAB".

Press on Radio Media to display the Press on Radio Media to display the
If the "DAB" station being listened to
primary page. primary page.
is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM"
option greyed out), or "DAB / FM auto
Select change of source. Press on the secondary page. tracking" is not activated, the sound
will cut out while the digital signal is too
weak.
Select "DAB Radio". Select "Settings".

Select "List" in the primary page. Select "RADIO".

or Select "Digital/FM auto


Select "Radio list" in the secondary
tracking" then "Confirm".
page.

Select the radio station from the list offered.

251

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Media
USB player Auxiliary socket (AUX) Selection of source
Press on Media to display the
primary page.

Select change of source.

Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to
or connect the USB device to the USB port the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
using a suitable cable (not supplied). (not supplied).

The system builds playlists (in temporary First adjust the volume of your portable device
memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
a few seconds to several minutes at the first audio system. Choose the source.
connection. Display and management of the controls are
Reduce the number of non-music files and the via the portable device.
The steering mounted SRC (source)
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
button can be used to go to the next
The playlists are updated every time the
media source, available if the source
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they
CD player is active.
Insert the CD in the player.
are not modified, the subsequent loading time Press OK to confirm the selection.
will be shorter.

252

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Information and advice


The audio equipment will only play audio files
with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file
extensions and with a bit rate of between
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or
CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select
the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
(file allocation table).
9
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. If the disc is recorded in another format it may
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. not be played correctly. The system does not support the
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played. It is recommended that the same recording simultaneous connection of two
"wma" files must be of the standard standard is always used for an individual disc, identical devices (two memory sticks,
wma 9 type. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) two Apple ® players) but it is possible
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 for optimum sound quality. to connect one memory stick and one
and 48 KHz. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Apple ® player at the same time.
Joliet standard is recommended.

It is recommended that the USB cable


It is advisable to restrict file names to for the portable device is used.
The system supports USB mass
20 characters, without using of special
storage devices, BlackBerry ® devices
characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing
or Apple ® players via USB ports. The
and displaying problems.
adaptor cable not supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied).

253

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players


Streaming allows audio files on your telephone
The classifications available are those
to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
of the portable device connected
(artists / albums / genres / playlists /
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" audiobooks / podcasts).
section, then "Bluetooth". The default classification used is by
Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile. artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
If play does not start automatically, it may be then select the desired classification
necessary to start the audio playback from the (playlists for example) and confirm
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port to go down through the menu to the
telephone. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Control is from the peripheral device or by desired track.
Play starts automatically.
using the audio system buttons.

Control is via the audio system.


The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
Once connected in streaming mode,
your Apple ® player.
the telephone is considered to be a
media source.
It is recommended that you activate
"Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.

254

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Managing the Jukebox


Connect the device (MP3 player...) to the USB
port or auxiliary Jack socket using a suitable
audio cable.
Select the magnifying glass to enter
the folder or album and select audio
file by audio file.
9
Select "Confirm" then "Copy".
When no audio file is copied to the
system, which has a capacity of 8 GB,
all of the Jukebox function symbols are
Select "New folder" to create a
greyed and are not available.
folder structure in the Jukebox.

Select "Media list".


Or

Select "Keep structure" to retain the


Select copy "Copy Jukebox". structure from the device.

While copying the system returns


Select "Sort by folder". to the primary page; you can go
back to the copy view at any time by
selecting this button.

Or
"Sort by album".

255

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Settings
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Audio settings

Audio settings

Audio settings

256

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Ambience Choose the sound ambience.

Balance Sound distribution using the Arkamys ® system.

Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle


Settings Sound effects
speed.

Audio settings Ringtones Set the telephone ringtone and volume.

Set the volume and voice for speaking street


Voice
names.

Confirm Save your settings.

Settings
Function that turns off the display.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Turn off screen

257

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2

Units

Factory settings

Configuration Adjust date and time

Display screen

258

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Comments

9
Set the units used to display distance, fuel
Units
consumption and temperature.
Settings Select the desired data in the list then press
Delete data
Delete.
Secondary page
Factory settings Return to factory settings.
System settings

Confirm Save the settings.

Settings

Secondary page Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.

Time/Date

Activate automatic text scrolling


Settings

Secondary page Activate animations Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.

Screen settings
Confirm

259

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2

Choice of language

Configuration Calculator

Calendar

260

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Comments

Settings

Secondary page Confirm Select the language then confirm. 9


Languages

Settings

Secondary page Select the calculator.

Calculator

Settings

Secondary page Select the calendar.

Calendar

261

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Audio settings
Press Settings to display the primary
The distribution (or spatialisation using On-board audio: Arkamys © Sound
page.
the Arkamys ® system) of sound is an Staging optimises sound distribution in
audio process that allows the audio the the passenger compartment.
Select "Audio settings". quality to be adapted to the number of
passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the 6-speaker
Select "Ambience" configuration.

The audio settings (Ambience, Bass,


Or
Treble and Loudness) are different
"Balance" and independent for each sound
source.
The settings for F-R balance and L-R
Or balance are common to all sources.
"Sound effects"

- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical


Or ambiences)
"Ringtones" - "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "Balance" ("Driver", "All
Or
passengers", "Front only")
"Voice". - "Audible response from touch screen"
- "Volume linked to vehicle
speed:" (Activate/Deactivate)

262

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Modifying system settings

Press on Settings to display the


primary page.
Press on Settings to display the
primary page.
Press on "Settings" to display the
primary page.
9
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page

Select "System Settings". Select "Screen settings". Select "Time/Date" to change the
time zone, synchronisation with GPS,
the time and its format, then the date.

Select "Units" to change the units Activate or deactivate "Activate


of distance, fuel consumption and automatic text scrolling" and Select "Languages" to change
temperature. "Activate animations". language.

Select "Delete data" to delete the


list of recent destinations, personal Select "Calculator" to display a
points of interest, contacts in the list. calculator.

Choose the item then select "Delete". Select "Calendar" to display a


calendar.

Select "Factory settings" to return


to the original settings.

263

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Internet
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

264

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Internet browser
Press on Internet to display the
primary page.

Press on "Internet browser" to


9
displays the browser's home page;
first connect your smartphone by
Bluetooth, option "Internet", see the
"Telephone" section.

Authentication for Internet browsing via


a smartphone is done using the Dial-Up
Networking (DUN) standard.

Some smartphones of the latest


generation do not support this
standard.

265

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Bluetooth (devices)

Usage monitor
Internet

Wi-Fi network connection

266

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Search Start the search for a device to connect.

Internet Start or end the Bluetooth connection to the


Connect / Disconnect
selected device.
Secondary page
Import contacts from the selected telephone to
Update
save them in the audio system.
Bluetooth
connection Delete Delete the selected telephone.

Confirm Save the settings.

Internet
Reset
Secondary page Reset the usage monitor, them confirm.
Confirm
Transfer rate

All Display all Wi-Fi networks.

Secure Display secure Wi-Fi networks.

Internet
Stored Memorise the selected Wi-Fi network(s).
Secondary page
Add Add a new Wi-Fi network.
WiFi connection

Activate / Deactivate Activate or deactivate a Wi-Fi network.

Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and


Connect
connect to it.
267

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

MirrorLinkTM

268

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

MirrorLinkTM smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
Please note:
- if your mobile is supported, to make
it "MirrorLinkTM" compatible, some
phone manufacturers nevertheless
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start
the application in the system.

Start the application on the


9
requires sustained attention by the invite you to first download a smartphone.
driver, using a smartphone when dedicated application.
driving is prohibited. - iPhone ® is not supported yet; an
All operations must be done with the Apple ® application, "CarPlay ®", is During the procedure, a page
vehicle stationary. being developed. showing the conditions for use is
displayed.
Accept to start and end the
The synchronisation of a personal connection.
smartphone allows applications on a As a safety measure, applications
smartphone that are adapted to the can only be viewed with the vehicle The "Audio source" and "Telephone"
MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed stationary; display is interrupted once functions remain available in the margin of the
in the vehicle's screen. the vehicle is moving. MirrorLinkTM display.
The principles and standards are
constantly evolving; for information Go to the home page to return to the
on supported smartphones, go to the "MirrorLinkTM" display.
PEUGEOT website for your country. When connecting a smartphone to
Select MyPEUGEOT if present. the system, it is recommended that
Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone
and Voice recognition
a USB cable is connected. The Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
smartphone charges when start voice recognition of your smartphone via
connected by a USB cable. the system.
Voice recognition requires a compatible
From the system, press "Internet" to telephone connected to the vehicle by
display the primary page. Bluetooth.

269

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Telephone
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Call log

Contacts

270

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
All calls

Incoming calls

Outgoing calls
Telephone
Contacts After making choices, start the call.
Call log
View
Magnifying glass
Create

Call

Addresses

New

Modify

Delete
View
Telephone Delete all
After making choices, start the call.
Contacts Search for contact

Confirm

Navigate to

Search for contact

Call

271

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Bluetooth (devices)

Telephone connection Devices detected

Telephone Options

272

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

9
Start the search for another peripheral device to
Search
connect.
Telephone
connection Start or stop the Bluetooth connection to the
Connect/ Disconnect
selected peripheral device.
Secondary page Import the contacts from the selected telephone
Update
to store them in the audio system.
Bluetooth
connection Delete Delete the selected telephone.

Confirm Save the settings.

Telephone
Telephone
connection

Secondary page Devices detected Audio streaming Start the search for peripheral devices.

Search for devices


Internet

Cut the microphone temporarily so that the


Put on hold contact cannot hear your conversation with a
passenger.
Telephone Import the contacts from the selected telephone
Update
connection to save then in the audio system.

Secondary page Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.

Telephone options Contact records used and free, percentage of


Memory info. storage space used by internal contacts and
Bluetooth contacts.

Confirm Save the settings.

273

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Pairing a Bluetooth®
telephone
For reasons of safety and because they
Procedure from the system
require prolonged attention on the part Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Select the name of the
of the driver, the operations for pairing and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone desired peripheral from the
the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the configuration). list and "Confirm".
hands-free system of the audio system
must be carried out with the vehicle Press on Telephone to display the
stationary. primary page. Enter a code of at least 4 figures for
the connection then "Confirm".

Procedure (short) from the Press on the secondary page.


telephone Enter this same code in the telephone then
In the Bluetooth menu of your device, select the accept the connection.
system name in the list of devices detected.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
The system offers to connect the telephone:
- in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device
only),
and confirm.
Select Search. - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
The list of telephones detected is playing of audio files from the telephone),
Enter this same code in the system,
displayed. - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
select "OK" and confirm.
telephone is compatible with the "DUN"
Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth standard).
If the telephone is not detected, it is Select one or more profiles and confirm.
recommended that you switch the Bluetooth
function on your telephone off and then on again.

274

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Connecting a Bluetooth®
peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
9
On switching on the ignition, the telephone
The services available depend on Depending on the type of telephone, connected when the ignition was last switched
the network, the SIM card and the the system will ask you to accept or not off is automatically reconnected, if this
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone the transfer of your contacts. connection mode had been activated during the
used. Check the telephone manual and If not, select "Update". pairing procedure.
with your network provider for details of
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
the services available to you.
message and the name of the telephone.

Manual connection
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone
The ability of the system to connect Press on Telephone to display the
connected is present again, it is reconnected
with only one profile depends on the primary page.
automatically and within around 30 seconds
telephone. The two profiles may both
after switching on the ignition the pairing is
connect by default. Press on the secondary page.
done without any action on your part, with
(Bluetooth activated).
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information To modify the automatic connection mode,
(compatibility, additional help, ...). select the telephone in the list then select the Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
desired profile. of paired peripherals.
The recognised telephone
appears in the list. Select the peripheral to connect.

Press on "Search".

Depending on your telephone, you may be


asked to accept automatic connection every
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
time the ignition is switched on.
message and the name of the telephone.

275

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Managing paired Receiving a call Making a call


telephones
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
This function allows the connection or Using the telephone is not
superimposed display in the screen.
disconnection of a peripheral device as recommended while driving.
well as the deletion of a pairing. Make a short press on the steering Park the vehicle.
mounted TEL button to accept an Make the call using the steering
Press on Telephone to display the incoming call. mounted controls.
primary page.
Make a long press Calling a new number
Press on the secondary page.
Press on Telephone to display the
on the steering mounted TEL button primary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list to reject the call.
of paired peripheral devices. Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Or
Select the peripheral in the list. Press "Call" to start the call.

Select "Search for devices" Select "End call".

Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the
Or
primary page.
"Connect / Disconnect" to start or
end the Bluetooth connection with
the selected device. Or make a long press

Or
"Delete" to delete the pairing. on the steering mounted TEL button.

276

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Select "Contacts".
Managing contacts / entries

Press on Telephone to display the


primary page.
Select "Directory information" for
the number of entries used,
9
available, ...
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Contacts".

Select "Call".

Select "Add contact".

Calling a recently used number


Select "Create" to add a new contact.

Press on Telephone to display the


primary page.
Or
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Select "Call log".

Or
Select the desired contact from the list offered. "Delete" to delete the selected
contact.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the
Or
vehicle first as a safety measure.
"Delete all" to delete all information
for the selected contact.

277

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Frequently asked questions


The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

Navigation
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
not successful. of toll roads on a toll motorway). menu.

The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.

The Hazard zone audible The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation"
warning does not work. menu.

The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of route
suggest a detour around settings.
an incident on the route.

I receive an Accident- Other than guidance, the system announces all Hazard zones Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the
prone area alert which is positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide Accident-prone area. Select "On the route" to no
not on my route. an alert for a Hazard zone located on nearby or parallel roads. longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions
or to reduce the time for the announcement.

278

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION


9
Certain traffic jams along On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to Wait until the traffic information is being received
the route are not indicated receive the traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons
in real time. on the map).

The filters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.

The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. so that there is GPS coverage by at least
4 satellites.

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the This phenomenon is normal. The system
weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.

279

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Radio
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area short-cut menu to enable the system to check
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
or the stored stations do the geographical area.
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not
block reception, including in RDS mode. indicate a fault with the audio system.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press and hold the "List" button at the steering
stations in the list of mounted controls to update the list of stations
stations received. received or press on the system update function:
"Update list".
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The name of the radio The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
station changes.

280

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Media
QUESTION
Playback of my USB
ANSWER
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down
SOLUTION
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
9
memory stick starts only access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
after a very long wait catalogue time). structure on the memory stick.
(around 2 to 3 minutes).

When I connect my iPhone When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port
as a telephone and to the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
the USB port at the same of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period
time, I am unable to play without sound of the track being played with Apple ® players.
the music files.

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. the right way up.
played by the player. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf, ...). cannot be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD:
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. - The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
- Some recorded CDs will not be played by
the audio system because they are not of the
correct quality.

There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain This phenomenon is normal.
period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes.
USB memory stick.

281

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION


The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
poor. suitable conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
unsuitable. an ambience.

Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
media information are not folders.
displayed correctly while
playing.

Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
does not start.

The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.

282

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Settings
QUESTION
In changing the setting
ANSWER
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.
SOLUTION
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
9
of treble and bass the Modifying one without the other is not possible. the desired musical ambience.
equalizer setting is
deselected.

In changing the equalizer


setting, treble and bass
return to zero.

When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
balance settings, the Modifying one without the other is not possible. obtain the desired musical ambience.
distribution setting is
deselected.

When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.

283

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION


There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between the Treble, Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the
different audio sources. sound sources, which may result in audible differences when sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
changing source. Audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"Linear", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after a depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge.
few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

284

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Telephone
QUESTION
I cannot connect my
ANSWER
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the -
SOLUTION
Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
9
Bluetooth telephone. telephone may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your
telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).

The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of
in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary.
inaudible.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
telephone communication. windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, ...).
Some contacts are The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
duplicated in the list. contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. telephone contacts".
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.

Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone
alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.

The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages
SMS text messages. to the system.

285

208_en_Chap9b_SMEGplus_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Audio and Telematics

Audio system / Bluetooth®

Contents
9
First steps 288
Steering mounted controls 289
Radio 290
Media 292
Telephone 296
Audio settings 299
Configuration 300
Screen menu map(s) 301
Frequently asked questions 302

As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations


which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of
the battery, the system switches off after activation of energy
economy mode.

287

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

First steps

On / Off, volume adjustment. Automatic search for a lower radio Automatic search for a higher radio
frequency. frequency.
Select the previous CD, USB track. Select the next CD, USB track.
Navigation in a list. Navigation in a list.
Press and hold: fast back. Press and hold: fast forward.
Select the source:
Radio: FM1, FM2, AM, CD, USB, Open the main menu.
AUX, Streaming.
Telephone: accept an incoming call.
Telephone, press and hold: end Display the list of stations received,
the CD/USB tracks or folders. Select a preset radio station.
a call, access the calls log for the
Press and hold: update the list of Radio, press and hold: preset a radio
connected telephone.
stations received. station.
Other than radio: see the
corresponding sections.
Adjust audio settings: sound
ambience, treble, bass, loudness,
Abandon the current operation. Eject CD.
distribution, left/right balance, front/
Go up one level (menu or folder).
rear balance, automatic volume.

288

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Steering mounted controls


Radio: select the previous / next
preset station.
CD / USB: select the genre /
artist / folder / playlist from the list
depending on classification.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: select the previous
track.
CD / USB: press and hold: fast back.
9
Select the previous / next item in a
menu.

Radio: automatic search for a higher Volume increase.


frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: select the next
track.
CD / USB: press and hold: fast Volume decrease.
forward.

Change the audio sound. Mute: cut the sound by


Confirm a selection. simultaneously pressing the volume
Start/end call with the telephone. increase and decrease buttons.
Press and hold: access to the Restore the sound: by pressing one
call log. of the two volume buttons.

289

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Radio
Presetting a station Managing a list Entering a frequency
Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to select Press LIST to display the list of Press on MENU.
the FM1, FM2 or AM waveband. stations received in alphabetical
order.

Select "Radio".
Press and hold one of the buttons to Select the desired radio station using
preset the station being listened to. one of the buttons.
The name of the station is displayed
and an audible signal confirms the Select "Write freq.".
preset.
Confirm with "OK".

Press +.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
tunnel, car park, below ground...) may
Briefly press one of the buttons to
prevent reception, even in RDS station
change to the next or previous letter.
tracking (alternative frequencies) mode. or
This phenomenon is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and is in no way press - to select the desired
indicative of a fault with the audio system. Press and hold on LIST to build or frequency.
update the list of stations; audio
reception is cut momentarily.
Confirm with "OK".
Selecting a station
Press a button to listen to the
corresponding preset station.

290

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

RDS
RDS, if activated, enables you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
Displaying RADIO TEXT
Radio text is information transmitted by
the radio station related to the current
programme or song.
9
messages. To operate, this function
However, in certain conditions, coverage needs good reception of a radio station
of an RDS station may not be assured transmitting this type of message.
throughout the country as radio stations When a traffic report is transmitted,
do not cover 100 % of the territory. This the current audio source (Radio, CD, With the radio displayed on the
explains the loss of reception of the USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to screen, press MENU.
station during a journey. play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end
of the transmission of the message. Select "Radio".

With source FM1 or FM2, press


MENU.
Press MENU.
Select or deselect "TXT" to activate
or deactivate the display of Radio
Select "Radio".
Text.
Select "Radio".
Confirm with "OK" to save the
setting.
Select or deselect "RDS" to switch
RDS on or off.
Select or deselect "TA" to activate
or deactivate the reception of traffic
Confirm with "OK" to save the messages.
setting.
Confirm with "OK" to save the
setting.

291

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Media
USB player
This unit comprises a USB port Press LIST to display the structure of
and a Jack auxiliary socket, the folders in the compilation.
depending on model.
Select a line in the list.

Confirm with "OK".

The system constitutes playlists (in Connect a USB memory stick to the USB port
temporary memory) the creation time or connect a USB device to the USB port using
for which can be from a few seconds to a suitable cable (not supplied). Up a level in the menu.
several minutes at the first connection.
Limiting the number of non-music files Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to
and the number of folders reduces this select "USB".
waiting time. The playlists are updated
every time the ignition is switched off or Press MENU.
a USB memory stick is connected. Press one of these buttons to select
The lists are memorised: if there is no the next or previous track in the list.
change in the lists, the next loading Select "Media".
time will be shorter.
Press one of these buttons to select
the next or previous folder in the Select or deselect "TA" to switch
order chosen. traffic announcements on or off.
At a first connection, the order
suggested is by folder. When
Press and hold one of these buttons Select the play mode: "Normal",
connecting again, the order previously
for fast forward or back. "Random", "Random all" or
chosen is retained.
"Repeat".

292

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Auxiliary socket (AUX) CD player


Insert a CD into the player, play starts
automatically.
Insert an MP3 compilation CD into the CD
Press LIST to display the folder
structure of the compilation.
9
player.
Select a line in the list.
The audio system searches for audio tracks,
which can take from a few to several dozen
seconds before play starts.
Confirm with "OK".
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to
the Jack auxiliary socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Press the SRC/TEL button
Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to repeatedly to select "CD". Return to the top level of the folder structure to
select "AUX". select the type of tracks.
- By Folders (CD or USB): all folders
Press one of these buttons to go the containing audio files recognised on the
First adjust the volume on the portable device the previous or next track in the list. peripheral device, in alphabetical order
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume on without following the folder structure.
your audio system. Control is from the portable - By Artist (USB only): all of the artist names
device. defined in the ID3 Tags, in alphabetical
Press one of these buttons to select
order.
the previous or next folder according
- By Genre (USB only): all of the genres
to the category chosen.
Do not connect a given device to both defined in the ID3 Tags.
the Jack auxiliary socket and the USB - By Playlist (CD or USB): if playlists have
port at the same time. been saved.
Press and hold one of these buttons
for fast forward or back.

293

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Information and advice


The audio system will only play files with The playlists accepted on CD, MP3, iPod and Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
".mp3", ".wma" and ".wav" on a CD and can USB connection are types ".m3u" and ".wpl". (File Allocation Table).
play files with ".ogg" extension only on USB. The number of files recognised is limited to
5 000 in 500 folders on a maximum of 8 levels.
The use of genuine Apple ® USB cables
is recommended to ensure correct
operation.
It is recommended that file names be of no On a single disc, the CD player can read up
more than 20 characters and avoiding special to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 folder levels
characters (ex : " ? ; ù) so as to avoid any with a maximum of 192 folders. However, it is
problem reading or displaying the files. recommended that this be kept to 2 levels so
as to limit the time taken to access and play
the CD.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or During play, the folder structure is not
CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select observed.
standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
not be played correctly. Do not connect a hard disk or USB device other
It is recommended that the same recording than audio players to the USB port. This may
standard is always used for an individual disc, cause damage to your installation.
with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.

294

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Bluetooth® audio streaming


Streaming allows music files on a telephone to
be heard via the vehicle's speakers.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SRC/TEL* button.
Connecting APPLE® players
9
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" Control of playback is via the audio system. The control
section. of common tracks is possible via the audio system
control buttons and the steering mounted controls**.
Contextual information can be displayed in the screen.
In the "Bluetooth: Audio" menu, select the
telephone to connect.
The audio quality depends on the quality of the Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port
The audio system connects automatically to a
transmission from the telephone. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
newly paired telephone.
Play starts automatically.
* In certain cases, the play of audio files must
be initiated from the keypad. Management of the device is via the audio
** If the telephone supports the function. system controls.

The classifications available are those on the


portable player connected (artists / albums /
genres / playlists/ audiobooks / podcasts).

The software version of the audio system may


not be compatible with the generation of your
Apple ® player

295

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone
A window is displayed with "Searching A virtual keypad is displayed on the
For safety reasons and because they
device". screen: choose a 4 digit code.
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone Confirm with "OK".
with the Bluetooth hands-free system The services available depend on
of your audio system must be carried the network, the SIM card and the
out with the vehicle stationary and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone
ignition on. used.
A message is displayed in the screen of the
Consult your telephone's manual and
telephone: enter the same code and confirm.
your operator to find out which services
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information are available to you. If pairing fails, try again; the number of
(compatibility, more help, ...). attempts is not limited.
A message appears in the screen to confirm
Select the telephone to be paired the result of the connection.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and from the list.
ensure that it is set as visible to all (refer to the Pairing can also be initiated from the
telephone instructions). Confirm with "OK". telephone by searching for detected
Bluetooth devices.
Press the MENU button.

Only one telephone can be paired at a time. The directory and the calls list can be
accessed after the synchronisation
Select "Bluetooth". period (if the telephone is compatible).
In some cases, the Bluetooth address of the Automatic connection must be
telephone may appear instead of the name of configured in the telephone to allow
the telephone. the connection each time the vehicle is
Select "Search". started.

296

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Managing connections
Press the MENU button. Select or deselect:
- "Tel.": hands-free connection
- "Audio": play audio files
Making a call
From the directory
Press the MENU button.
9
Select "Bluetooth".
"OK" to confirm the choice. Select "Telephone".

Select "BT management" and


confirm. The list of paired telephones "Delete" to delete the pairing. Select "Call".
is displayed.

Indicates connection of the audio


Select "Directory".
profile. It is not possible to pair more than
5 telephones. Press MENU and
Indicates connection of the hands- select "Bluetooth". Select "BT
management". If 5 telephones are Select the desired number.
free profile.
already paired, select the telephone to
delete by pressing "OK" and selecting
"Delete" (refer to the "Managing
In the list, select a telephone to pair. Confirm with "OK" to start the call.
connections" section).

Confirm with "OK".

297

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Making a call Receiving a call


Recently called numbers*
Press and hold SRC/TEL to display Press one of these buttons to go to An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
the calls list. the previous or next page in the list. superimposed display in the screen.

Press SRC/TEL.
For access to the calls list, it is also "OK" starts the call.
possible to press MENU, select
"Telephone", then select "Call", and or
finally select "Calls list". select "YES" to accept the call,

The calls list includes the calls sent


from and by from the vehicle via the
or
In the list of calls, select the number connected telephone.
It is possible to make a call directly from select "NO" to reject the call.
and choose "Missed calls", "Dialed
calls" or "Answered calls". the telephone; stop the vehicle as a
safety measure.

Scroll through the calls list. Pressing and holding the back
button,

or
Confirm with "OK".
on SRC/TEL also rejects an
incoming call.

* Depending on the compatibility of the


telephone.
298

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Audio settings
Managing calls
Hang up
In the contextual menu, select "Hang
up" to end the call.
Combined mode
(to leave the vehicle without ending the call)
Press ¯ to display the audio settings
menu.
Press ¯ to go to the next setting.
9
From the contextual menu:
Pressing and holding on SRC/TEL Select "Combined mode" to transfer
also ends the call. The settings available are:
the call to the telephone.
- AMBIANCE: BASS, TREBLE and
LOUDNESS.
Select "Combined mode" to transfer - BALANCE (left/right balance), FADER
the call to the vehicle. (front/rear balance)
- SOUND DIST. (driver or passenger).
Secret - Mute
- AUTO VOLUME.
(so that the caller cannot hear)

In certain cases, the combined mode has


In the contextual menu: to activated from the telephone.
The distribution, or spatialisation of
The Bluetooth connection will be
Select "Micro OFF" to switch off the sound, is an audio process which
restored automatically if the ignition
microphone. allows the sound quality to be improved
has been switched off, then on again
according to the setting chosen,
(depending on the compatibility of the
corresponding to the position of the
Select "Micro OFF" to switch the telephone). listeners in the vehicle.
microphone on again.

The AMBIANCE, TREBLE and BASS


audio settings are different and
independent for each sound source.

299

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Configuration
Display and language settings
Press the MENU button.

Select "Config.".

Select "Displaying" to activate or


deactivate scrolling text.

Select "Language" to modify the


display language.

Select "Version" for information on


the software.

Select "System" when you want to


install an update. Information can be
obtained from a PEUGEOT dealer.

Select "Unit" to modify the units for


temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit).

300

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Screen menu map(s)


MENU
1
Radio
1
Telephone 2

3
Language

Deutsch
9
TA Call
2 2
English
3
RDS Directory
2 3
Español
3
TXT Calls list
2 3
Français
3
Write freq. Missed calls
2 4 Italiano
3
Dialed calls
4 Nederlands
Media 3
1 Answered calls
4 Português
3
Normal Phone status
2 2 Português-Brasil
3

Random Bluetooth Русский


2
1 3

Random all Türkçe


2 BT management 3
2
Repeat Version
2 Search 2
2

TA System
2 Config. 2
1
Unit
2
Displaying
2 Celsius
3
Scrolling text
3 Fahrenheit
3

301

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Frequently asked questions


The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (volume, bass, Check that the audio settings (volume, bass,
sound quality between the treble, ambience, loudness) can be adapted to the different sound treble, ambience, loudness) are adapted to the
different audio sources sources, which may result in audible differences when changing sources listened to. It is advisable to adjust
(radio, CD...). source (radio, CD...). audio settings (bass, treble, Front-Rear balance,
Left-Right balance) to the middle position, select
the musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

When changing the Choosing an ambience imposes settings for treble and bass. Modify the treble and bass settings or the
settings for treble and Modifying one without the other is only possible with a personalised ambience setting to obtain the desired sound
bass, the ambience setting ambience. quality.
is deselected.
When changing the
ambience setting, treble
and bass are reset to zero.

When changing the Choosing the "driver" distribution setting imposes a balance setting. Modify the balance setting or the distribution
balance setting, setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
distribution is deselected.

302

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION

The quality of reception of


the radio station listened
ANSWER

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
SOLUTION

Activate the RDS function to enable the system


to check whether there is a more powerful
9
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 MHz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not
block reception, including in RDS mode. indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. is too frequent and always on the same route.

Traffic announcement The radio station does not broadcast traffic information. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
TA is displayed. I do information.
not receive any traffic
information.

The stored stations are not An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the SRC/TEL button to return to the
found (no sound, 87.5 MHz waveband (FM1 or FM2) on which the stations
is displayed...). are stored.

303

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain - Check that the CD is inserted in the player
automatically or is not any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot the right way up.
played by the player. play. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is cannot be played if it is too damaged.
not recognised by the audio equipment. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
poor. suitable conditions.

The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

The Bluetooth connection The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
is cut.

The message "USB device The USB memory stick is not recognised. Use only USB memory sticks formatted to FAT 32
error" is displayed on the (28-bit file allocation table).
screen.

A telephone connects Automatic connection overrides manual connection. Modify the telephone settings to remove
automatically, automatic connection.
disconnecting another
telephone.

304

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION

An iPod is not recognised


when connecting to the
USB port.
ANSWER

The iPod is of a generation that is not compatible with the USB


connection.
SOLUTION

9
The hard disk or device Some hard disks and devices need a power supply greater than is Connect the device to the 230 V socket, the 12 V
is not recognised when provided by the audio system. socket or an external power supply.
connecting to the USB Caution: ensure that the device does not
port. transmit a voltage greater than 5 V (risk of
destruction of the system).

When streaming, the Some telephones prioritise connection of the "hands-free" profile. Delete the "hands-free" connection profile to
sound cuts momentarily. improve streaming.

In "Random all" play, not In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to
all of the tracks are played. 999 tracks.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
audio system switches off depends on the battery charge. charge.
after a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.

The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of
the playing of the CD.

305

208_en_Chap9c_RDE2_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Audio and Telematics

Audio system

Contents
9
First steps 308
Steering mounted controls 309
Radio 310
Media 312
Audio settings 314
Screen menu map(s) 315
Frequently asked questions 316

As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations


which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of
the battery, the system switches off after activation of economy
mode.

307

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

First steps

On / Off, volume adjustment. Display the list of stations received, Automatic search step by step for a
the CD/MP3 tracks or folders. higher radio frequency.
Press and hold: update the list of Select the next CD track.
stations received. Navigation in a list.
Press and hold: fast forward.
Selection of source:
FM1, FM2, AM, CD, AUX. Manual search step by step for a Open the main menu.
higher radio frequency.
Select the next MP3 track.
Adjust audio settings: Navigation in a list.
sound ambience, treble, bass,
loudness, left/right balance,
Manual search step by step for a Select a preset radio station.
automatic volume.
lower radio frequency. Radio, press and hold: preset a radio
Select the previous MP3 track. station.
Navigation in a list.
Automatic search for a lower/higher
radio frequency.
Select the next CD track. Abandon the current operation. Eject CD.
Navigation in a list. Go up one level (menu or folder).
Press and hold: fast forward or back.

308

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Steering mounted controls


Radio: select the previous / next
preset station.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
CD / MP3: select the previous track.
CD: press and hold: fast back.
9
Radio: automatic search for a higher Volume up.
frequency.
CD / MP3: select the next track.
CD: press and hold: fast forward.
Volume down.

Change audio source. Mute on: cut the sound by


Confirm a selection. simultaneously pressing the volume
up and down buttons.
Mute off: press one of the volume
buttons.

309

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Radio
Presetting a station Managing the list RDS
Press the SRC/BAND button Press LIST to display the list of
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue
repeatedly to select the FM1, FM2 or stations received, in alphabetical
listening to the same station by automatic
AM waveband. order.
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
Press and hold a button to preset the Select the desired radio station by by an RDS station may not be assured
station being listened to. The name pressing one of the buttons. throughout the country as radio stations
of the station is displayed and an do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
audible signal confirms that it has explains the loss of reception of the
been preset. station during a journey.
Confirm with OK.

Press MENU.
The external environment (hills,
buildings, tunnels, basement car
Briefly press one of the buttons to
parks) may block reception, including
change to the next or previous letter. Select "Radio".
in RDS mode. This is a normal effect
of the way in which radio waves are
transmitted and does not indicate any
failure of the audio equipment. Press and hold on LIST to construct
Confirm with OK.
or update the list of stations; the
sound is interrupted temporarily.

Selecting a station Select "RDS".

Press a button to listen to the


corresponding preset station.
Confirm with OK.

310

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Select "On" or "Off" to switch RDS


on or off.
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
Select "On" or "Off" to switch
on or off the reception of traffic
announcements.
9
messages. To operate, this function
Confirm with OK. needs good reception of a radio station Confirm with OK.
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted, the
current audio source (Radio, CD, ...)
is interrupted automatically to play the
TA message. Normal playback of the
audio source resumes at the end of the
transmission of the message.

Press MENU.

Select "Radio".

Confirm with OK.

Select "Traffic TA".

Confirm with OK.

311

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Media
Display RADIO TEXT Auxiliary socket (AUX) CD player
Insert a CD into the player, play starts
Radio Text is information transmitted
automatically.
by the radio station on the station or on
Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player.
the song being played.
The audio system searches for audio tracks,
which can take from a few to several dozen
seconds before play starts.
Press MENU.

Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to


the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
Select "Radio".
(not supplied).
Press the SRC/BAND button
Press the SRC/BAND button repeatedly to select "CD".
Confirm with OK. repeatedly and select "AUX".

Press one of these buttons to select


First adjust the volume on your portable device a track in the list.
Select "INFO TEXT". (to a high level). The adjust the volume on your
audio system. Control is from the portable
device.
Press one of these buttons to select
Confirm with OK. the previous or next folder according
to the category chosen.

Select "On" or "Off" to switch radio


text on or off. Press and hold one of these buttons
for fast forward or back.
Confirm with OK.

312

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Playing a compilation
Press LIST to display the folder
structure for the compilation.
Go back to the first level to select the track
classification:
- By Folders: all folders containing audio
Play mode
Press MENU.
9
files recognised on the peripheral device,
Select a line in the list. in alphabetical order, ignoring the folder Select "Media".
structure.
- By Playlist: depending on the playlists
saved. Confirm with OK.
Confirm with "OK".

Select the desired play mode.


Jump a page.
The play modes available are:
- Normal: the tracks are played
in order, depending on the
classification of the selected files. Confirm with OK to save the
Select a folder / Playlist.
- Random: the tracks in an album changes.
or folder are played in a random
order.
Start play of the chosen track. - Random all: all of the tracks saved
in the media ar played in random
order.
- Repeat: the tracks played are only
Go up one level. those from the current album or
folder.

313

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Audio settings
Information and advice
The audio system can only play files with Playlists accepted are types .m3u and .pls. Press ¯ to display the audio settings
".mp3", ".wma" or ".wav" extensions. The system can recognise up to 5 000 files in menu.
500 folders on 8 levels.
The settings available are:
- AMBIANCE,
It is advisable to restrict file names to On a given disc, the CD player can read up to - BASS,
20 characters without using special characters 255 MP3 files spread over 8 levels. However, - TREBLE,
(e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels - LOUDNESS,
problems. to reduce the access time before the CD is - BALANCE (L/R),
played. - AUTO VOLUME.
The folder structure is not observed during
playback. Select the settings to adjust.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or


CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select Confirm with OK.
standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording Adjust the setting.
standard is always used for a given disc, with
as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for
optimum sound quality. Confirm with OK.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.

The AMBIANCE, TREBLE and


BASS settings are different and
independent for each sound source.

314

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Screen menu map(s)


MENU
1
Radio
1
Displaying 9
Traffic SCROLLING
2 2

RDS
2

TEXT INFO
2
Unit
1

Media Celsius
1 2

Play Fahrenheit
2
2

Normal
3

Random
3

Random all Language


3 1

Repeat
3

TEXT INFO
2

315

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Frequently asked questions


The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between the Treble, Ambiance, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound Treble, Ambiance, Loudness) are adapted to
different audio sources sources, which may result in audible differences when changing the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
(radio, CD...). source (radio, CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Fader, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position,
select the musical ambience "None" and set the
loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD
mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

When changing the Choosing an ambiance imposes settings for treble and bass. Modify the treble and bass settings or the
settings for treble and Modifying one without the other is not possible. ambiance setting to obtain the desired sound
bass, the ambiance setting quality.
is deselected.
When changing the
ambiance setting, treble
and bass are reset to zero.

316

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

9
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Switch on the RDS function to enable the system
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area to check whether there is a more powerful
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 MHz is displayed...).
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not
block reception, including in RDS mode. indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.

The traffic announcement The radio station does not broadcast traffic information. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
(TA) is displayed. I do information.
not receive any traffic
information.

The stored stations are not An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the SRC button to return to the waveband
found (no sound, 87.5 MHz (AM, FM1, FM2) on which the stations are stored.
is displayed...).

317

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain - Check that the CD is inserted in the player
automatically or is not any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot the right way up.
played by the player. play. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is cannot be played if it is too damaged.
not recognised by the audio equipment. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
poor. suitable conditions.

The audio settings (bass, treble, ambiance) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambiance.

In "Random all" play, not In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to
all of the tracks are played. 999 tracks.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
audio system switches off depends on the battery charge. charge.
after a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.

The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of
the playing of the CD.

318

208_en_Chap9d_RDE1_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Alphabetical index

A B
Accessories...................................................169
Access to rear seats........................................12
Active City Brake............................................133
AdBlue ®..........................................................185
Additive, AdBlue.......................................43, 185
Adjusting headlamps.....................................152
Battery.................................................... 190-192
Battery, charging............................................192
Battery, remote control..............................32, 33
Blind, panoramic roof.......................................26
Blue HDi.........................................................185
Bluetooth (hands-free)...........................270, 296
Checking the levels................................... 51, 86,

Checking tyre pressures


176, 177, 215

(using the kit)...............................................206


Checks............... 19, 70, 176, 177, 190, 215, 216
Child lock........................................................101
.
Adjusting head restraints...........................63, 67 Bluetooth (telephone).............................270, 296 Children............................................. 87-101, 104
Adjusting seats.....................................12, 62, 64 Bonnet............................................................ 175 Child seats ...............................................87-100
Adjusting the air distribution................ 75, 77, 80 Boot..................................................................28 Child seats, conventional.................................93
Adjusting the air flow............................74, 76, 80 Brake discs.................................................... 215 Child seats, ISOFIX.........................................97
Adjusting the date............................................36 Brake lamps...........................................158, 159 Closing the boot...............................................28
Adjusting the seat belt Brakes...................................................... 41, 215 Closing the doors.............................................16
height...................................................102, 103 Braking assistance Connection, Bluetooth.......... 266, 274, 275, 296
Adjusting the temperature................... 74, 76, 78 system..........................................................136 Connection, MirrorLink..................................269
Adjusting the time......................................36, 37 Braking, automatic Connection, Wi-Fi network............................266
Advice on driving...........................................109 emergency...........................................133, 136 Control, electric windows.................................81
Airbags..................................................... 47, 105 Bulbs (changing).................................... 154-160 Control, emergency
Airbags, curtain...................................... 107, 108 boot release...................................................31
Airbags, front.........................................105, 108 Control, heated seats.......................................65
Airbags, lateral....................................... 107, 108 Controls, at steering..................... 226, 289, 309
Air conditioning.............................................. 142 Control stalk, lighting............................. 145, 151
Air conditioning, digital....................................78 Control stalk, wipers.................................. 83-85
Air conditioning, manual................................. 76 Courtesy lamp..................................................25
Air intake........................................69, 75, 77, 80 Cruise control......................................... 128, 131
Air vents...........................................................69
Alarm................................................................29
C Cup holder......................................................161

Alloy wheels...................................................172 Cable, audio...................................252, 293, 312


Anti-lock braking system (ABS).....................136 Capacity, fuel tank.........................................180
Anti-theft..........................................................13 CD..................................................252, 293, 312
Armrest, front...........................................65, 161 CD, MP3.........................................252, 293, 312
Assistance call...............................................221 Central locking...........................................16, 18
Assistance, emergency Changing a bulb..................................... 154-160
braking.........................................................136 Changing a fuse......................................193-198
Audio streaming (Bluetooth)................ 254, 295
Audio system (radio).............................. 287, 307
Changing a wheel.................................. 208-214
Changing a wiper blade...................................86
D
Auxiliary...................................24, 252, 293, 312 Changing the remote control DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) -
battery............................................................32 Digital radio..................................................250
Checking the engine oil level...........................57 Date (setting)....................................................36

319

208_en_Chap10_index-alpha_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Alphabetical index

G
Daytime running Emissions control system, SCR..............45, 185 Gauge, fuel..............................................34, 180
lamps........................................... 150, 154-156 Engine compartment............................. 176, 177 Gearbox, automatic....................... 116, 142, 192
Deactivating the passenger Engine, Diesel................................ 177, 183, 184 Gearbox, electronic...................... 114, 142, 192
airbag...........................................................106 Engine, petrol.........................................176, 183 Gearbox, manual.................................. 112, 142
Deadlocking..................................................... 17 Environment......... 32, 70, 73, 142, 187, 200, 216 Gear lever, manual
Defrosting...................................................72, 73 gearbox........................................................ 112
Demisting...................................................72, 73 Gear shift indicator..........................................59
Dials and gauges.............................................34 Glove box.......................................................161
Dimensions.................................................... 217 Guide-me-home............................... 12, 149, 151
Dipstick..................................................... 57, 215
Direction

F
indicators............. 144, 151, 154, 155, 158, 159
Display screen, instrument
panel........................................................35, 59
Door pockets..................................................161 Filling the fuel
Driving economically.....................................142 tank...................................................... 180-183
Dynamic stability control Filter, air.........................................................216

H
(DSC).............................................42, 136, 138 Filter, oil..........................................................216
Filter, particle................................................. 181
Filter, passenger
compartment.........................................70, 216 Hazard warning
Fitting a wheel................................................ 213 lamps...........................................................144
Fitting roof Hazard warning lamps,
bars..............................................................164 automatic operation.....................................144
Fittings, boot..................................................163 Headlamps, automatic
Fittings, interior..............................................161 illumination...................................................149
Flap, fuel filler.........................................180, 182 Headlamps, dipped
Flashing indicators......................... 144, 151, 155
E
beam............................................ 145, 154-156
Foglamp, rear................................. 147, 158, 159 Headlamps, halogen..............................154, 155
Foglamps, front.......................147, 153, 157, 160 Headlamps, main
Eco-driving .................................................... 142 Frequency (radio)...........................242, 290, 310 beam............................................ 145, 154-156
Electronic brake force distribution Fuel................................................................183 Head restraints,
(EBFD).........................................................136 Fuel consumption...........................................142 front................................................................63
Emergency braking assistance Fuel tank................................................180, 182 Head restraints,
(EBA)...........................................................136 Fusebox, dashboard......................................195 rear........................................................... 67, 68
Emergency call..............................................220 Fusebox, engine Heating........................................... 71, 74, 76, 78
Emergency warning compartment...............................................198 Hill start
lamps...........................................................144 Fuses..............................................................193 assist..............................................................23

320

208_en_Chap10_index-alpha_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Alphabetical index

I M
Identification, vehicle.....................................219
Ignition..............................................................15
Immobiliser, electronic...............................13, 33
Indicator, coolant temperature...................34, 51
Indicator, engine oil level......................... 57, 215
Kit, temporary puncture
repair............................................................203
Maintenance, routine.....................................142
Map reading lamps..........................................25
Markings, identification..................................219
Mat.................................................................162
Menu............................ 228, 230, 234, 242, 244,
246, 256, 258, 260, 270, 272
.
Indicator lamps, operation......................... 37-48
Indicators, direction.......................144, 155, 159 Menus (audio)................................242, 244, 246
Inflating tyres......................................... 142, 219 Menus (Touch screen).......................... 223, 227
Mirror, rear view............................................. 111
L
Inflating tyres and accessories
(using the kit)...............................................206 Mirrors, door.................................................. 110
Input, auxiliary................................252, 293, 312 Misfuel prevention..........................................182
Instrument panels............................................34 Labels, identification......................................219 Mountings, Isofix..............................................96
Instruments and controls.................................61 Lamps, parking.............................................. 151 MP3 CD..........................................252, 293, 314
Internet.................................................. 264, 265 LEDs - light-emitting
Isofix mountings...............................................96 diodes..........................................................159
Level, AdBlue ®
additive........................................................185
Level, brake fluid................................ 41, 43, 215
Level, Diesel additive..................................... 181
Level, engine coolant....................................... 51
Level, engine oil....................................... 57, 215 N
J Levels and checks........................ 51, 56, 73, 86,
176, 177, 189, 215, 216
Level, screenwash fluid...................................86
Navigation......................................................228
Number plate lamps.......................................160
Jack............................................... 208, 209, 252 Light-emitting diodes -
Jukebox..........................................................255 LEDs............................................................159
Jump starting.................................................191 Lighting dimmer...............................................52
Lighting, directional........................................153
Lighting, guide-me home................. 12, 149, 151

O
Lighting, interior.........................................25, 27
Lighting, mood.................................................27
Loading..................................................142, 164
Load reduction Opening the bonnet....................................... 175

K mode..............................................................60
Locating your
vehicle............................................................12
Opening the boot.......................................28, 31
Opening the doors..................................... 11, 28
Opening the fuel filler flap..............................180
Key with remote control........... 11, 13, 15, 16, 33 Locking the boot..............................................28 Opening the panoramic
Kit, hands-free.......................................274, 296 Low fuel level...........................................46, 180 roof blind........................................................26

321

208_en_Chap10_index-alpha_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Alphabetical index

P
Pads, brake................................................... 215 Recirculation, air.................................. 75, 77, 80 Screen menu................ 228, 230, 234, 242, 244,
Paint colour code...........................................219 Reduction of electrical 246, 256, 258, 260, 270, 272
Paint, matt......................................................172 load................................................................60 Screenwash.....................................................85
Parcel shelf, rear............................................164 Regeneration of the particle Screenwash,
Park Assist.....................................................122 filter.............................................................. 181 rear.................................................................85
Parking brake........................................... 19, 215 Reinitialising the remote SCR (Selective Catalytic
Peugeot Connect control............................................................32 Reduction)...................................................185
Assistance...................................................221 Reminder, key in ignition..................................15 Seat belts..........................................93, 102-104
Peugeot Connect Reminder, lighting on.....................................148 Seat, rear bench..............................................66
Packs...........................................................221 Remote control............................... 11, 13, 16, 33 Seats, front...........................................12, 62, 64
Peugeot Connect SOS..............................220 Removing a wheel......................................... 211 Seats, heated...................................................65
Plates, identification......................................219 Removing the mat..........................................162 Seats, rear........................................................67
Player, Apple ®....................................... 254, 295 Replacing bulbs..................................... 154-160 Serial number,
Player, MP3 CD..............................252, 293, 312 Replacing fuses......................................193-198 vehicle..........................................................219
Player, USB............................................252, 293 Replacing the air filter....................................216 Service indicator..............................................54
Port, USB.........................................24, 252, 293 Replacing the oil filter....................................216 Servicing........................................................ 142
Pressures, tyres.............................................219 Replacing the passenger Settings (Menus)........................... 256, 258, 260
Priming the fuel compartment filter.................................70, 216 Settings, system.............................................263
system..........................................................184 Reservoir, screenwash....................................86 Sidelamps.......145, 150, 151, 154-156, 158, 159
Protecting Resetting the service indicator........................56 Side repeater.................................................158
children........................................... 87-101, 104 Reversing camera.......................................... 121 Snow chains................................................... 171
Puncture.........................................................203 Reversing lamps....................................158, 159 Socket, 12 V accessory...................................24
Risk areas (update)........................................239 Socket, auxiliary
Roof bars........................................................164 Jack.......................................24, 252 , 293, 312
Roof, panoramic...............................................26 Sockets,
Running out of fuel (Diesel)...........................184 audio..................................... 24, 312 , 293, 312
Speed limiter.......................................... 126, 131
Starting the engine..........................................13

R
Starting using another
battery..........................................................191
Station, radio..................................242, 290, 310
Radio..............................................242, 290, 310 Stay, bonnet................................................... 175
Radio, digital (Digital Audio Steering mounted controls,
Broadcasting - DAB)............................250, 251
S
audio............................................................226
RDS............................................... 249 , 291, 310 Stop & Start.......................................20, 72, 122,
Rear screen, 175, 180, 190
demisting.......................................................73 Safety, children................................. 87-101, 104 Storage.....................................................65, 161
Recharging the battery..................................192 Screen, instrument panel.......................139, 140 Stowing rings.................................................163

322

208_en_Chap10_index-alpha_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Alphabetical index

U
.
Switching off the engine..................................15 Under-inflation
Synchronising the remote (detection)............................................ 200-202
control............................................................32 Unlocking......................................................... 11
Unlocking the boot...........................................28
Updating risk
areas............................................................239
Updating the date.............................................36
Updating the time.............................................36
UREA.............................................................185
USB..................................................24, 252, 293

T
Tables of fuses...............................................193
Tank, AdBlue ® additive..................................185
Tank, fuel................................................180, 182
Telephone..............................................270, 294
Temperature, coolant....................................... 51
V
Third brake lamp............................................160 Ventilation.........................69-71, 74, 76, 80, 142
Three flashes (direction
indicators)....................................................144
Time (setting).............................................36, 37
TMC (Traffic info)...........................................240
Tools...................................................... 208, 209
Touch screen...................................53, 140, 202

W
Touch screen (Menus).......................... 223, 227
Towbar............................................................165
Towing another vehicle..................................168
Traction control (ASR).............................42, 136 Warning and indicator lamps..................... 37-48
Traffic information (TA).................. 241, 291, 311 Warning lamp, SCR emissions
Traffic information (TMC)...............................240 control system...............................................45
Trailer.............................................................165 Wheel, spare......................................... 208, 209
Trajectory control systems.............................136 Window controls..............................................81
Triangle, warning...........................................199 Wiper blades (changing)..................................86
Trip computer..........................................139-140 Wiper, rear.......................................................85
Tyres....................................................... 142, 219 Wipers................................................. 39, 83, 84
Tyre under-inflation detection................ 200-202 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive......................84

323

208_en_Chap10_index-alpha_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
This handbook describes all of the equipment Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by We draw your attention to the
available in the whole range. application of the provisions of the European following points:
regulation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of
- The fitting of electrical equipment or
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set
accessories not listed by PEUGEOT may
equipment described in this document, by this regulation and that recycled materials
cause faults and failures with the electrical
depending on its trim level, version and the are used in the manufacture of the products
system of your vehicle. Contact a
specification for the country in which it is sold. that it sells.
PEUGEOT dealer for information on the
range of recommended accessories.
The descriptions and illustrations are given Reproduction or translation of all or part of - As a safety measure, access to the
without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT this document is prohibited without written diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
reserves the right to modify the technical authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT. electronic systems, is reserved strictly for
specifications, equipment and accessories PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops,
without having to update this edition of the equipped with the special diagnostic
handbook. For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified tool required (risk of malfunctions of the
workshop that has the technical information, vehicle's electronic systems that could
This document is an integral part of your competence and equipment required, which a cause breakdowns or serious accidents).
vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. The manufacturer cannot be held
in the event of sale or transfer. responsible if this advice is not followed.
In addition, there are labels present in your - Any modification or adaptation not
vehicle to warn you of the need for certain intended or authorised by Automobiles
precautions to take for your safety; don't PEUGEOT or carried out without meeting
remove them, they will be useful again for a the technical requirements defined by the
new owner. manufacturer would lead to the suspension
of the legal and contractual warranty.

Printed in the EU

Anglais
03-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Anglais
www.peugeot.com AN. 15208.0040

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cancels and replaces
Practical information

Dimensions (in mm)

217

AN. 15208.A040

additif_208_en_Chap08_Informations-pratiques_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Connected services
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Internet browser
Press on Connected services to
display the primary page.

Press on " Internet browser " to


displays the browser's home page;
first connect your smartphone by
Bluetooth, option "Internet", see the
" Telephone" section.

Authentication for Internet browsing via


a smartphone is done using the Dial-Up
Networking (DUN) standard.

Some smartphones of the latest


generation do not support this
standard.

.
3

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2

Bluetooth (devices)

Usage monitor
Internet connection settings

Wi-Fi connection

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Comments

Search Start the search for a device to connect.


Connected
Start or end the Bluetooth connection to the
services Connect/Disconnect
selected device.

Secondary page Import contacts from the selected telephone to


Update
save them in the audio system.
Bluetooth
connections Delete Delete the selected telephone.

Confirm Save the settings.

Connected services
Reset
Secondary page Reset the usage monitor, them confirm.
Confirm
Transfer rate

All Display all Wi-Fi networks.

Secure Display secure Wi-Fi networks.


Connected
services Remember Memorise the selected Wi-Fi network(s).

Secondary page
Add Add a new Wi-Fi network.
Wi-Fi connection
On/Off Activate or deactivate a Wi-Fi network.

Connect
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and
connect to it. .
5

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

MirrorLinkTM

Optional depending on the


smartphone and operating system.

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

MirrorLinkTM smartphone As a safety measure, applications


Start the application on the
smartphone (optional, depending
connection can only be viewed with the vehicle
on the smartphone and operating
stationary; display is interrupted once
system).
As a safety measure and because it the vehicle is moving.
requires sustained attention by the During the procedure, several screen
driver, using a smartphone when pages relating to certain functions
driving is prohibited. Please note: are displayed.
All operations must be done with the - if your smartphone is supported, to Accept to start and end the
vehicle stationary. make it "MirrorLinkTM" compatible, connection.
some phone manufacturers
Once connection is established, an page
nevertheless invite you to first
is displayed with the applications already
The synchronisation of a download a dedicated application.
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted
smartphone allows applications on a
to MirrorLinkTM technology.
smartphone that are adapted to the
If only one application has been downloaded to
MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed
When connecting a smartphone to the smartphone, it starts automatically.
in the vehicle's screen.
the system, it is recommended that
The principles and standards Access to the different audio sources remains
Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone.
are constantly evolving. For the accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM
communication process between the Connect a USB cable. The display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
smartphone and the system to work smartphone charges when Access to the menus for the system is possible
correctly, the smartphone must be connected by a USB cable. at any time using the dedicated buttons.
unlocked; update the operating system
of your smartphone as well as the date From the system, press "Connected
and time in the smartphone and the services" to display the primary
Voice recognition
system. page.
For the list of eligible smartphones, Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
connect to the brand's internet website Press " MirrorLinkTM" to start start voice recognition of your smartphone via

.
in your country. the application in the system. the system.
Voice recognition requires a compatible
smartphone connected to the vehicle by
Bluetooth.
7

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

Access or return to the applications already


downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
MirrorLinkTM technology.

Access to a menu list depending on the


Connected application chosen.
services "Back": abandon the current operation, go up
one level.
MirrorLinkTM "Home": access or return to the "Car mode"
page.

Access to the "Connected services" primary


page.

.
9

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

CarPlay®

10

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

CarPlay® smartphone
connection
As a safety measure and because it
Connect a USB cable. The Voice recognition
smartphone charges when
requires sustained attention by the Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
connected by a USB cable.
driver, using a smartphone when start voice recognition of your smartphone via
driving is prohibited. the system.
On connecting the USB cable, the
All operations must be done with the
" Telephone" function changes to
vehicle stationary.
"CarPlay" in the menu carrousel.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay ® interface.
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
Or
smartphone that are adapted to the
CarPlay ® technology to be displayed in
Connect the USB cable. The
the vehicle's screen.
smartphone is charged while
As the principles and standards are
connected by the USB cable.
constantly evolving, it is recommended
that you update the operating system of From the system, press "Connected
your smartphone. services" to display the primary
For the list of eligible smartphones, page.
connect to the brand's internet website
in your country. Press on "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay ® interface.

As a safety measure, applications During the procedure, one or more


screen pages relating to certain

.
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once functions are displayed on connection.
the vehicle is moving.

11

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

12

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Audio and Telematics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments


Favourites

Calls The "Telephone" function is placed automatically


in "Siri" voice mode.
Telephone Contacts
Press on "Display contacts" for access to the
Keypad telephone menus.

Messages

Lists

Artists Press on "Music" to browse and select the


tracks on your smartphone.
Music Tracks
Press on "Playing" for access to the track
Albums currently playing.
Connected
services
Other...
Apple ® CarPlay®
Press on "Destinations" to search for an address
by "Siri" voice command or by using the keypad.
Plan Destinations
The GPS function is through the telephone's 3G,
4G or Wi-Fi internet connection.

The "Messages" function is place automatically


in "Siri" voice mode to speak the message and
Messages Display messages the addressee.
Press on "Display messages" for access to the

.
messages.

Playing Access to the track currently playing.


13

Additif-2_en_web_AC-AP_SMEGplus_Services_connectes_ed01-2015

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Manual gearbox
5-speed 6-speed
) Move the gear lever fully to the right to ) Move the lever fully to the right to
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
engage 5th gear. engage 5th or 6th gear.
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
Engaging reverse Engaging reverse gear

The gear shift indicator is displayed in


the instrument panel.

) Move the gear lever fully to the right then ) Raise the collar below the gear lever knob,
backwards. then push the lever fully to the left and then
forward.

Only engage reverse gear when the


vehicle is stationary and the engine is Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle
at idle. is stationary and the engine is at idle.

112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Electronic gearbox
5-speed 6-speed Automated mode
This mode allows gear changing without action
by the driver.
5
Moving off
Lever at position N.
) Press the brake pedal firmly.

R. Reverse. R. Reverse. ) Start the engine.


N. Neutral. N. Neutral. ) Place the lever at A or R.
A. Automated mode. A. Automated mode.
M. Manual mode. M. Manual mode. ) Release the brake pedal and press
the accelerator pedal progressively.

If the engine does not start:


You can change from position A to M - If N is flashing in the instrument panel,
and from M to A at any time. move the lever to position A then to
position N.
- If the message "Foot on the brake" is
displayed, press firmly on the brake pedal.
The A, R or N position of the lever is indicated
in the display.

113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Stopping - Moving off on a slope Manual mode Steering mounted paddles


Do not uses the accelerator to hold the vehicle,
but apply the parking brake.

Stopping - Parking
Place the lever at N and apply the parking
brake.

Manual gear changing


This mode allows manual sequential gear ) Press the back of the "+" paddle to
changing. change up.
) Press the back of the "-" paddle to change
down.
) Move the selector lever to M.
The gear engaged is indicated in the display.
) Push the lever forward to
change up.

) Pull the lever back to change down.


This occasional manual gear changing can
be used for overtaking, for example, while
remaining in automated mode.
) Operate the + or - steering mounted control
paddle.
The gearbox engages the gear requested if
the engine speed permits. AUTO remains
displayed in the instrument panel.
After a few moments with no action on the
controls, the gearbox returns to automatic
management of the gears.

114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Creep function
Depending on the engine, the vehicle moves without pressing the accelerator.

Assistance with low-speed


Advice
Following disconnection of the battery, you
have to reinitialise the gearbox.
With the ignition on, the
illumination of this warning
lamp and the flashing of AUTO,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the
5
manoeuvres ) Switch the ignition on.
screen, indicate a gearbox fault.
With the engine running at idle, parking brake AUTO and - appear in the instrument
released and the lever placed at A, M or R, the panel.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
vehicle moves off when your release the brake
qualified workshop.
pedal. ) Select position N.
It stops on opening the driver's door. Closing
the door, and putting your foot on the brake ) Press the brake pedal firmly.
or accelerator pedal allows movement of the
vehicle again.
) Wait around 30 seconds until N or a gear
appears in the instrument panel.

) Release the brake pedal.

The gearbox is operational again.

115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Automatic gearbox
Display in the instrument panel Automated mode
This mode allows gear changes without action
by the driver.

When you select a position with the lever,


the corresponding symbol is displayed in the
instrument panel. Moving off
Parking brake applied.
P. Park. Foot on the brake warning ) Start the engine.
R. Reverse ) Lever at position P or N.
N. Neutral. Press the brake pedal when this
D. Drive - AUTO driving mode. comes on in the instrument panel. ) Press firmly on the brake pedal.
S. Sport - More dynamic driving.
7 Snow - Driving on snow covered roads.
) Release the parking brake.
) Place the selector at D or R.

) Release the brake pedal and press


the accelerator pedal progressively.
The vehicle then moves off.

Never leave children unsupervised in


the vehicles when the engine is running.

116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Advice When the engine is at idle, if position R,

5
D or M is selected with the brakes
) Select position D for automatic
changing of the gears.
Manual mode released, the vehicle moves on its own
without pressing the accelerator.
Never leave children unsupervised
This mode allows manual sequential gear
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive inside the vehicle when the engine is
changing.
mode, without action by the driver. It running.
) Move the gear lever to M.
continuously selects the most suitable gear for Apply the parking brake and select
the driving style, the relief of the road and the ) Push the lever forward to position P if carrying out a maintenance
load in the vehicle. change up. operation with the engine running.
For maximum acceleration, without touching ) Pull the lever back to change down.
the gear lever, press the accelerator pedal fully
down (kick down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or holds the gear engaged up to
maximum engine speed. Invalid value Never select position N when the
When braking, the gearbox changes down This symbol is displayed if a gear vehicle is moving.
automatically to provide effective engine is not properly engaged (selector Never select positions P or R unless
braking. between two positions). the vehicle is at a complete stop.
When you take your foot off the accelerator
pedal quickly, the gearbox does not change up,
You can change from D to M and M to D
for your improved safety.
at any time.
If position N is engaged by mistake
when moving, take your foot off
the accelerator pedal, then engage
position D to accelerate.
When the ambient temperature is
below -23°C, the engine should be
left running at idle for four minutes
after starting, to ensure the correct
operation and durability of the engine
and gearbox.

117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Driving

Sport programme Return to normal automatic With the ignition on, illumination of
this warning lamp, accompanied
This special programme completes the operation by an audible signal and an alert
automatic operation of the gearbox in certain ) Press the button again at any time message in the screen, indicates of
circumstances. to quit the Sport programme and gearbox fault.
return to auto-adaptive mode.
) Press the "S" button once the In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up
engine is running. mode by staying in 3rd gear. You may then
notice a pronounced jerk when changing
The gearbox automatically operates in a way from P to R and from N to R. This jerk does not
best suited to dynamic driving. present any risk to the gearbox.
S appears in the instrument panel. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h) while
Switching off - Parking keeping to local speed limits.
Before switching off the engine. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
) Move the lever to position P or N. workshop as soon as possible.
Snow programme ) Apply the parking brake.
This special programme completes the ) Immobilise the vehicle.
automatic operation and makes it easier to
move off and make progress in conditions of You risk damaging the gearbox:
poor grip. If the lever is not in position P, a ) if you press the brake and
message appears in the screen accelerator pedals at the same
) Press the 7 button, once the on opening the driver's door or time,
engine has started. approximately 45 seconds after ) if you force the movement of the
switching off the ignition. lever from position P to another
The gearbox adapts its operation to driving on position with a flat battery.
) Place the lever at position P; the
slippery surfaces. To reduce fuel consumption during
message disappears.
7 appears in the instrument panel. prolonged stops with the engine running
On flooded roads or when crossing a
ford, drive at walking pace. (traffic jams...), position the gear
lever at N and apply the parking brake.

118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Petrol engines
Engine oil capacity* Recommended nose
Engine Engine type code Gearbox Unbraked trailer (kg)
(litres) weight (kg)
CE5 / KR5 Manual
1.0 PureTech 68 3.13 450 / 600** 30
(EB0 / EB0F) (5-speed)
QA5 Manual
1.2 PureTech 68 - - -
(EB2FB) (5-speed)
CG5 / KQ5 Manual
3.13 520 46
(EB2 / EB2F) (5-speed)
1.2 PureTech 82
CGP ETG5 electronic
3.13 520 46
(EB2 MAPS) (5-speed)
KQV ETG5 electronic
1.2 PureTech 82 S&S 3.13 500 33
(EB2F) (5-speed)
CQJ / CZJ Manual
- 570 / 450 46
(EB2DT / EB2DTM) (5-speed)
1.2 PureTech 110 S&S
CQQ / CZQ EAT6 automatic
- 570 / 450 46
(EB2DT / EB2DTM) (6-speed

CA5 Manual
4.25 580 46
(EP6C) (5-speed)
1.6 VTi 120
CAL Automatic
4.25 580 46
(EP6C) (4-speed)

KHK Manual
1.6 THP 165 S&S 4.25 580 46
(EP6FDT) (6-speed)
KJK Manual
1.6 THP 208 S&S 4.25 580 46
(EP6FDTX) (6-speed)
* Capacity with oil filter replacement.
** Affaire version.
178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Practical information

Diesel engines

8
Engine oil capacity* Recommended nose
Engine Engine type code Gearbox Unbraked trailer (kg)
(litres) weight (kg)
BX5 Manual
1.6 HDi 75 3.75 570 46
(DV6EM) (5-speed)
KM5 Manual
1.6 BlueHDi 75 - 570 46
(DV6FE) (5-speed)
KMJ Manual
1.6 BlueHDi 75 S&S - 410 46
(DV6FE) (5-speed)
BW5 / BF5 Manual
1.6 HDi 92 3.75 570 46
(DV6DM / DV6D) (5-speed)
BFS ETG6 electronic
1.6 e-HDi 92 S&S 3.75 570 46
(DV6D) (6-speed)
KE5 Manual
1.6 BlueHDi 100 - 570 46
(DV6FD) (5-speed)
KEJ Manual
1.6 BlueHDi 100 S&S - 520 46
(DV6FD) (5-speed)
LAK Manual
1.6 BlueHDI 115 S&S - 570 46
(DV6FCD) (6-speed)
KDK Manual
1.6 BlueHDi 120 S&S - 570 46
(DV6FC) (6-speed)

* Capacity with oil filter replacement.


179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Stop & Start


The system puts the engine temporarily into Operation
standby - STOP mode - during stops in the
traffic (red lights, traffic jams, ...). The engine STOP mode Special cases
restarts automatically - START mode - as soon
The "ECO" lamp comes on in the STOP mode is not invoked when:
as you want to move off. The restart takes
instrument panel and the engine goes - the driver's door is open,
place instantly, quickly and silently.
into standby. - the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
With e-HDi or BlueHDi Diesel and an (10 km/h) since the last engine start using
emissions as well as the noise level when
electronic gearbox: the key,
stationary.
- Speed below 40 mph (6 km/h). - the engine is needed to maintain a
- Gear lever in position N comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
Or
- demisting is selected,
- Brake pedal pressed. - some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
With BlueHDi Diesel and a manual gearbox: ambient temperature...) where the engine is
- As soon as the vehicle stops. needed to assure control of a system.
- Gear lever in neutral and clutch pedal
released.
The "ECO" lamp flashes for a
few seconds then goes off.
With PureTech petrol and a manual, This operation is perfectly normal.
electronic or automatic gearbox:
- As soon as the vehicle stops
- Gear lever in neutral and clutch pedal
released (manual gearbox).
- Brake pedal pressed or gear lever in
position N (electronic or automatic
gearbox).

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Advice
A time counter calculates the sum
START mode
The "ECO" lamp goes off and the
Special cases
As a safety measure and for your comfort,
2
engine restarts. START mode is invoked automatically when:
of the periods in STOP mode - you open the driver's door,
during a journey. It rests itself With a manual gearbox: - you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
to zero every time the ignition is - Clutch pedal depressed. - some special conditions (battery charge,
switched on with the key. engine temperature, braking assistance,
With an electronic / automatic gearbox: ambient temperature...) where the engine is
For your comfort, during parking
- Gear lever in position A/D or M. needed for control of a system.
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not
- Brake pedal released.
available for a few seconds after
coming out of reverse gear.
The Stop & Start system does not affect or
the functionality of the vehicle, such as - Gear lever in position N.
- Brake pedal released. The "ECO" warning lamp flashes for
for example, braking, ...
- Then gear lever in position A/D or M. a few seconds, then goes off.

With a manual gearbox in STOP mode, This operation is perfectly normal.


or
if you engage a gear without fully
depressing the clutch pedal, a message - Reverse gear engaged.
is displayed asking you to fully depress
the clutch pedal so that the engine can
restart.

Never refuel with the engine in


STOP mode; you must switch off the
ignition with the key.

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Access and starting

Manual deactivation Operating fault


In some circumstances, such as maintaining
a comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment, it may be useful to deactivate
Stop & Start.
The system can be deactivated at any time,
once the ignition is on.

Opening the bonnet


This control switches off the Stop & Start In the event of a fault with the system, the "ECO
Before doing anything under the
system. OFF" switch warning lamp flashes then comes
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
- Press. on continuously.
system to avoid the risk of injury
- The indicator lamp in the control Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
related to an automatic change to
remains on. qualified workshop.
START mode.
- A message is displayed. In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle
If the vehicle is stationary in Stop mode, the may stall. All of the warning lamps come on. It
engine immediately restarts. is then necessary to switch off the ignition and
start the engine again using the key.
Manual reactivation
- Press. The Stop & Start system requires a
Driving on flooded roads
- The indicator lamp in the control goes off. 12 V battery of special specification and
Before driving through a flooded road,
- A confirmation message is displayed. technology.
it is strongly recommended that you
All work on this type of battery must
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
If the engine is in STOP mode, it then be done by a PEUGEOT or a qualified
For more advice on driving, particularly
restarts. workshop.
on flooded roads, refer to the
The Stop & Start system is reactivated For more information on the 12 V
corresponding section.
automatically every time the ignition is battery, refer to the corresponding
switched on. section.

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like